ACS800

Firmware Manual

Inline Control Program

Inline Control Program Firmware Manual

3AUA0000002046 / 3AFE64787616 REV C / EN EFFECTIVE: 04/14/2008 SUPERSEDES: 03/11/2004

2008 ABB Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Table of Contents

Introduction to the manual Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 How to copy data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 How to set the display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3 3 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

Table of Contents

ii

Program features Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update cycles in the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flux Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36

Table of Contents

iii

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preprogrammed Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor temperature measurement through the analog I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 46 46 47 48 48 49

Table of Contents

iv

DriveAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Master/Follower General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist for a quick start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/Follower link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/Follower link specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application macros Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dancer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tension macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE LP SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN LP TORQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE LP TORQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loadshare macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals and parameters Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06 CH0 DATASETS IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 SYS CTRL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 TORQ REF CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 SPEED REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 67 68 68 70 70 71 71 72 76 78 80 80 81 83 86 89 91 95 95 55 55 55 57 58 58 59 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 51 52 53 53 54

Table of Contents

26 FLUX CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 27 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 35 MTR TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 50 PULSE ENCODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 51 FIELDBUS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 60 APPLIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 61 DRAW TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 62 DANCER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 63 TENSION CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 64 INERTIA CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 65 LOADSHARE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 90 DATASET INPUT SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 92 DATASET OUTPUT SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 95 HARDWARE SPECIFIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Fieldbus control Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up communication through Advant controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 800M Advant Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DriveBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 80 Advant Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical ModuleBus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1, Setting up communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2, Default connections for the cyclical fieldbus communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 135 136 137 139 140 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 142 143 143 144 144 144 144 145

Table of Contents

vi

Table 3, DataSet 1 Word 1 - Fieldbus Main Cmd Wd (Actual Signal 06.01) . . . . . . . . . . Table 4, DataSet 1 Word 3 - Fieldbus Aux Cmd Wd (Actual Signal 06.03) . . . . . . . . . . Table 5, Main Status Word (Actual Signal 02.26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6, Auxiliary Status Word (Actual Signal 02.27). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7, Auxiliary Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 02.28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8, Pack Status Bits (Actual Signal 03.15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9, Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.15). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10, Alarm Word 2 (Actual Signal 02.16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11, Alarm Word 3 (Actual Signal 02.17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12, Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13, Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 02.19). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14, Fault Word 3 (Actual Signal 02.20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15, System Fault Word (Actual Signal 02.21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 16, INT Fault Info Word (Actual Signal 02.22). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17, Limit Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.23). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18, Follower MCW (Actual Signal 02.25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19, Limit Word Inv (Actual Signal 02.41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault tracing Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional data: actual signals and parameters Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A1: Motor Rotor Inertia, US Appendix A2: Motor Rotor Inertia, IEC Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

145 146 147 148 149 149 150 150 151 151 152 152 153 154 155 155 156

157 157 157 157 157 158 163 164

171 171 171 171 171 172 174

Figure B-1, Dancer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Figure B-2, Tension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Figure B-3, Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Table of Contents

vii

Figure B-4, SPD/TQ Chain 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Figure B-5, SPD/TQ Chain 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Table of Contents

viii

Table of Contents

Introduction to the manual

Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it contains information about the compatibility, safety, intended audience, and related publications.

Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS 800 Inline Control Program (version BHXR3500 and above). See 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION.

Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive. Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual. Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the subsection describing the related user-adjustable parameters.

Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.

Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters: Start-up instructs in performing an ID Run. Control panel gives instructions for using the panel. Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the user settings and diagnostic signals. Master/Follower describes the setup to even load systems with multiple ACS800 drives that operate motors, which are interconnected by belts, gears, or chains. Application macros contains a short description of each macro. Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the drive.

Introduction to the manual

Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication links. Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and remedies. Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the actual signals and parameters. actual signals and parameters. Appendix A1: Motor Rotor Inertia, US lists motor inertia data for US applications. Appendix A2: Motor Rotor Inertia, IEC lists motor inertia data for IEC applications. Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams diagrams the signal flow for the speed and torque chains.

Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Drives - Sales, Support and Service network on the right pane.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select Drives - Training courses on the right pane.

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives, then select successively Drives - Document Library - Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives) on the right pane.

Introduction to the manual

Start-up

Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to: complete the initial start-up. perform an identification run (ID Run) for the drive.

How to start-up
SAFETY The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions. Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation manual. Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the driven machine if: - There is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or - A Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive setup (see section How to perform the ID Run on page 7). POWER-UP Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel identification data then the Identification Display of the drive and after a few seconds the panel enters the Actual Signal Display. The drive is now ready for the start-up.
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx ....... ACS 800 xx kW ID NUMBER 1 1 -> 0.0 rpm O FREQ 0.00 Hz CURRENT 0.00 A POWER 0.00 %

Start-up

START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99) Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is described below.
The general parameter setting procedure: - Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel. - Press the double-arrow keys ( - Press the arrow keys ( or or ) to scroll the parameter groups. 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE [ENGLISH] O ) to scroll parameters within a group. or ), fast change using the 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH O

- Select the value you would like to modify by pressing ENTER. - Change the value using the arrow keys ( double-arrow keys ( or ).

- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).

Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting procedure is given above.

1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 02 APPLICATION MACRO [ ] Note: Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate. For example, if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate, setting the value of parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm will result in incorrect operation of the drive.

Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:

ABB Motors
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M/L 55 No Ins.cl. F IP 55 Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 30 1475 32.5 0.83 50 56 1475 50 0.83 30 50 1470 34 0.83 30 1470 30 59 0.83 50 1475 50 54 0.83 30 35 1770 59 0.83 60 3GAA 202 001 - ADA 6210/C3 180 IEC 34-1

V 690 Y 400 D 660 Y 380 D 415 D 440 D Cat. no

380 V mains voltage

6312/C3

- motor nominal voltage

Allowed range: 1/2 UN2 UN of ACS800. (UN refers to the highest voltage in each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500 VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)

1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 07 MOTOR NOM FREQ [ ] O

- motor nominal current

Allowed range: 1/6 I2hd 2 I2hd of ACS 800

- motor nominal frequency

Range: 8300 Hz

- motor nominal speed Range: 118000 rpm

1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 08 MOTOR NOM SPEED [ ]

Start-up

-motor nominal power Range: 09000 kW When the motor data has been entered, a warning appears. It indicates that the motor parameters have been set, and the drive is ready to start the motor identification (ID magnetization or ID Run). Select the motor identification.
The ID Run (STANDARD) should be selected. For more information, see section How to perform the ID Run on page 7.

1 -> 0.0 rpm O 99 START-UP DATA 09 MOTOR NOM POWER [ ] 1 -> 0.0 rpm ** WARNING ** ID MAGN REQ 1 -> 0.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN [STANDARD] O

DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Check the direction of rotation of the motor.
- Press ACT to get the status row visible. - Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ). - Press to start the motor. . - Check that the motor is running in the desired direction. - Stop the motor by pressing 1 L->[xxx] rpm I FREQ xxx Hz CURRENT xx A POWER xx %

To change the direction of rotation of the motor: - Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and ground with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged. - Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the motor terminals or at the motor connection box. - Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the check as described above.

forward direction

reverse direction

Start-up

SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES Set the minimum speed.

1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 01 MINIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 20 LIMITS 02 MAXIMUM SPEED [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 02 ACCELER TIME 1 [ ] 1 L-> 0.0 rpm 22 ACCEL/DECEL 03 DECELER TIME 1 [ ] O

Set the maximum speed.

Set the acceleration time 1.

Set the deceleration time 1.

The drive is now ready for use.

Start-up

How to perform the ID Run

For this application, the Standard ID Run must be performed. Uncouple the motor from the spool if possible. If the motor cannot be uncoupled from the spool, ensure the spool is at core. Note: DIIL must be made and 16.01 RUN ENABLE must be set to Yes or the digital input made in order to perform the ID Run.

ID Run Procedure Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions: 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% Ihd 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50% 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 < 1 s 70.06 CH2 M/F MODE - Set to Not In Use Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row). Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes. Change the selection to STANDARD.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm 99 START-UP DATA 10 MOTOR ID RUN [STANDARD] O

Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:

1 L ->1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** ID RUN SEL O

To start the ID Run, press the

Warning when the ID Run is started 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** MOTOR STARTS I

key.
Warning after a successfully completed ID Run 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** ID DONE I

Warning during the ID Run 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 800 55 kW **WARNING** ID RUN I

Start-up

In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. However: The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop key ( ). After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).

Start-up

Control panel

Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to control, monitor and change the settings of the drive using the control panel CDP 312R. The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the Standard Control Program; displays produced by other control programs may differ slightly.

Overview of the panel

The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters. The language is selected at start-up by parameter 99.02. The control panel has four operation modes: - Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

- Parameter Mode (PAR key) - Function Mode (FUNC key) - Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key) The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys, and ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

The drive control keys: No. Use Start Stop Activate reference setting Forward direction of rotation Reverse direction of rotation Fault reset Change between Local / Remote (external) control

ENTER

1 2

7
LOC REM

6
RESET

3
REF

3 4

I
4

0
5 2

5 6 7

Control panel

10

Panel operation mode keys and displays The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode ACT Act. signal / Fault history selection Act. signal / Fault message scrolling ENTER Parameter Mode PAR Group selection Fast value change Parameter selection Slow value change ENTER Function Mode FUNC ENTER Row selection Function start 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 7 Status row List of functions Enter change mode Accept new value 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 10 START/STOP 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 Status row Parameter group Parameter Parameter value Enter selection mode Accept new signal 1 L -> FREQ CURRENT POWER 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz 80.00 A 75.00 % Status row Actual signal names and values

Drive Selection Mode DRIVE ENTER Drive selection ID number change Enter change mode Accept new value ACS 801 75 kW xxxxx ASAA5000 ID NUMBER 1 Device type Application name, version and ID number

Status row The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number Drive control status L = Local control R = Remote control = External control

1 L ->

1242.0 rpm I
Drive reference

Direction of rotation -> = Forward <- = Reverse

Drive status I = Running O = Stopped = Run disabled

Control panel

11

Drive control with the panel

The user can control the drive with the panel as follows: start, stop, and change direction of the motor give the motor speed reference or torque reference reset the fault and warning messages change between local and external drive control. The panel can be used for drive control when the drive is under local control and the status row is visible on the display. How to start, stop and change direction
Step 1. Action To display the status row.
ACT PAR

Press Key

Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

FUNC

2.

To switch to local control. (only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)

LOC REM

3.

To stop

4.

To start

5.

To change the direction to reverse.

1 L <-1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

6.

To change the direction to forward.

Control panel

12

How to set speed reference

Step 1. Action To show the status row.
ACT PAR

Press Key

Display 1 ->1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

FUNC

2.

To switch to local control. (Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L on the first row of the display.)

LOC REM

3.

To enter the Reference Setting function.

REF

4.

To change the reference. (slow change) (fast change)

5.

To save the reference. (The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is restored automatically after power switch-off.)

ENTER

1 L -> 1325.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

Control panel

13

Actual signal display mode

In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can: show three actual signals on the display at a time select the actual signals to display view the fault history reset the fault history. The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT key, or does not press any key within one minute. How to select actual signals to the display
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. Press key Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 80.00 A CURRENT POWER 75.00 %
ENTER

ACT

2.

To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected row).

3.

To enter the actual signal selection function.

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 CURRENT 80.00 A 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS 05 TORQUE 70.00 %

4.

To select an actual signal. To change the actual signal group.

5.a

To accept the selection and return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz 70.00 % TORQUE POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

5.b

To cancel the selection and keep the original selection. The selected keypad mode is entered.

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

Control panel

14

How to display the full name of the actual signals

Step 1. Action To display the full name of the three actual signals. Press Key Hold
ACT

Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQUENCY CURRENT POWER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I FREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

2.

To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

Release
ACT

How to view and reset the fault history Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
Step 1. Action To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. Press Key Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 LAST FAULT +OVERCURRENT 6451 H 21 MIN 23 S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
RESET

ACT

2.

To enter the Fault History Display.

3.

To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning (DOWN).

To clear the Fault History.

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT H MIN S 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

4.

To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

Control panel

15

How to display and reset an active fault The table below includes the step-by-step instructions. WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been removed, the drive will trip again.
Step 1. Action To display an active fault.
ACT

Press Key

Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm ACS 801 75 kW ** FAULT ** ACS 800 TEMP 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

2.

To reset the fault.

RESET

About the fault history The fault history reports information on the latest events (faults, warnings and resets) logged by the drive. The table below shows how these events are stored in the fault history.
A Fault History View Sequential number (1 is the most recent event) Sign 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 2 LAST FAULT +OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S Name Power-on time

Event Drive detects a fault and generates a fault message.

Information on display Sequential number of the event. Name of the fault and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.

User resets the fault message.

Sequential number of the event. -RESET FAULT text. Total power-on time.

Drive generates a warning message.

Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a + sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.

Drive deactivates the warning message.

Sequential number of the event. Name of the warning and a - sign in front of the name. Total power-on time.

Control panel

16

Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can: view the parameter values change the parameter settings. The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key. How to select a parameter and change the value
Step 1. Action To enter the Parameter Mode.
PAR

Press Key

Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 10 START/STOP/DIR 01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1

2.

To select a different group.

3.

To select a parameter.

4.

To enter the parameter setting function.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI1] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT [AI2]

5.

To change the parameter value. - (slow change for numbers and text) - (fast change for numbers only)

6a.

To save the new value.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI2 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 11 REFERENCE SELECT 03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1

6b.

To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

Control panel

17

How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from that of the other parameters.
Step 1. Action See the table above to: - enter the Parameter Mode - select the correct parameter group and parameter - enter the parameter setting mode
PAR

Press key

Display 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00]

ENTER
2. To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit fields. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.000.00] 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [000.018.00]
ENTER

3.

To adjust the value of a field.

4.

To accept the value.

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM 06 INPUT1 [ 001.018.00] Inversion field Group field Index field Bit field

Inversion field inverts the selected parameter value. Plus sign (+): no inversion Minus (-) sign: inversion. Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the parameter value is a packed boolean word). Index field selects the parameter index. Group field selects the parameter group.

Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows: - Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of the line is now a constant setting field. - Give the constant value to the constant setting field. - Press Enter to accept.

Control panel

18

Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can: copy the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel. copy group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive. 1) adjust the contrast of the display. The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key. How to copy data from a drive to the panel Note: Uploading must be completed before downloading. The uploading and downloading are possible only if the program versions of the destination drive are the same as the versions of the source drive, see 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION and 33.02 APPL SW VERSION. The drive must be stopped during the downloading.
Step 1. Action Set-up the drives. In each drive, activate the communication to the optional equipment. See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES. In one drive, set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred. Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC

Press Key

Display

2. 3.

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4

4.

Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).

5. 6.

Enter the upload function. Switch to external control. (No L on the first row of the display.)

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= 1 -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4

LOC REM

7.

Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into which the data will be downloaded.

The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included as default. The restriction prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.

1)

Control panel

19

How to download data from the panel to a drive Consider the notes in section How to copy data from a drive to the panel above.
Step 1. 2. Action Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the drive. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to change to local control. Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC LOC REM

Press Key

Display

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 % 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O <=<= UPLOAD DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4

3.

4.

Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function). Start the download.

5.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O DOWNLOAD =>=>

How to set the display contrast

Step 1. Action Enter the Function Mode.
FUNC

Press Key

Display 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> CONTRAST 4 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 4 CONTRAST

2.

Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).

3. 4.

Enter the contrast setting function. Adjust the contrast.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O CONTRAST [4] 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm CONTRAST [6]

5.a

Accept the selected value.

ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 6 CONTRAST 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O UPLOAD <=<= DOWNLOAD =>=> 4 CONTRAST

5.b

Cancel the new setting and retain the original value, press any of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

Control panel

20

Drive selection mode

In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one panel link. (For more information, see Installation and Start-up Guide for the Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY58919748). In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can: Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link. Change the identification number of a drive or panel connected to the panel link. View the status of the drives connected on the panel link. The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key. Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the drive is 1. Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.

How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number

Step 1. Action To enter the Drive Selection Mode.
DRIVE

Press Key ACS 800

Display 75 kW

ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1 2. To select the next drive/view. The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with double-arrow buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting. The status display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up to view the rest of them. ACS 800 75 kW

ASAAA5000 xxxxxx ID NUMBER 1

1o Status Display Symbols: o = Drive stopped, direction forward = Drive running, direction reverse F = Drive tripped on a fault
PAR

3.

To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the mode selection keys. The selected mode is entered.

ACT

FUNC

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 45.00 Hz FREQ CURRENT 80.00 A POWER 75.00 %

Control panel

21

Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display

Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format. In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0

Boolean Hex

0000 0000 0001 1010 0 0 1 A

Control panel

22

Control panel

23

Program features

Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.

Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link.
Local Control ACS800 External Control

Standard I/O Control panel Fieldbus Adapter Slot 1

CH3 (DDCS) DriveWindow

RTAC/RDIO/RAIO Slot 1 or Slot 2 module Fieldbus Adapter RDCO Nxxx CH0 Board (DDCS) Advant controller (e.g. AC 80, AC 800 M) CH1 AIMA-01 I/O (DDCS) adapter module

RTAC/RDIO/RAIO module

Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm I

The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode.

Program features

24

External control When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the control terminal block on the standard I/O board (digital and analog inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or CH0 Fieldbus Adapter. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control. External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control. 1 ->1242 rpm I 1 R ->1242 rpm I

External Control through the Input/ Output terminals, or through the fieldbus interfaces

External Control by control panel

The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. Settings
Panel Key LOC/REM Parameter 11.02 10.01 10.02 11.03 10.03 10.04 11.06 Group 98 OPTION MODULES Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 Start and stop source for EXT1 Direction source for EXT1 Reference source for EXT1 Start and stop source for EXT2 Direction source for EXT2 Reference source for EXT2 Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication Additional Information Selection between local and external control

Program features

25

Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 / Std IO DI2 / Std IO I/O Extensions See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control Select DI1, DI2 XT DI1 EXT1 Start/stop 10.01

DI1 / DIO EXT 1

Fieldbus Adapter Slot1 CH0 / RDCO board

COMM. MODULE KEYPAD

Control panel

DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the Digital I/O Extension Module 1 (DI7 in Parameters)

Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO AI2 / Std IO AI3 / Std IO AI1, AI2, AI3 XT AI1 I/O Extensions See parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES Fb. selection See chapter Fieldbus control Control panel Select EXT1 Reference REF1 (rpm) 11.03

AI1 / AIO ext

CH0 / RDCO board

COMM. MODULE KEYPAD

AI1 / Std IO = analog input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block AI1 / AIO ext = analog input AI1 on the Analog I/O Extension Module (AI5 in Parameters)

Program features

26

Reference types and processing

It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal maximum value corresponds to a speed other than the maximum speed limit. Settings
Parameter Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 20 LIMITS Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Group 32 SUPERVISION Additional Information External reference source, type and scaling Operating limits Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps Reference supervision

Diagnostics
Actual signal Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output Reference value Additional Information The reference values in different stages of the reference processing chain.

Program features

27

Programmable analog inputs

The drive has three programmable analog inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if an optional Analog I/O Extension Module is used. Each input can be inverted and filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. Update cycles in the Control Program
Input AI / standard AI / extension Cycle 10 ms 10 ms

Settings
Parameter Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 35.01 Group 61 DRAW TRIM Group 62 DANCER CONTROLS Group 63 TENSION CONTROLS Group 65 LOADSHARE CONTROL 98.06 98.14 Additional Information Reference source Processing of the standard inputs Motor temperature measurement Draw reference source Reference and feedback sources Reference and feedback sources Loadshare reference - activation of optional analog inputs - signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)

Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.1801.20 01.38, 01.39 Additional Information Standard inputs Optional inputs

Program features

28

Programmable analog outputs

Two programmable current outputs are available as standard, and two outputs can be added by using an optional Analog I/O Extension Module. Analog output signals can be inverted and filtered. The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed (scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc. It is possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Control Program
Output AO / standard AO / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms

Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Group 35 MTR TEMP MEAS Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional Information Value selection and processing (standard outputs) Motor temperature measurement Activation of optional I/O

Diagnostics
Actual value 01.22, 01.23 01.28, 01.29 Warning IO CONF Improper use of optional I/O Additional information Values of the standard outputs Values of the optional outputs

Program features

29

Programmable digital inputs

The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are available if the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules are used. Update cycles in the Control Program
Input DI / standard DI / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms

Settings
Parameter Group 10 START/STOP/DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Group 16 SYS CTRL INPUTS Group 61 DRAW TRIM Group 62 DANCER CONTROLS Group 63 TENSION CONTROLS 98.0398.04 Additional Information Start, stop, direction source Reference selection, reference source Constant speed selection External run enable, fault reset, user macro change Digital potentiometer for reference Regulator control Regulator control Activation of the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules

Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.17 01.40 Warning IO CONF Improper use of optional I/O Additional Information Standard digital inputs Optional digital inputs

Program features

30

Programmable relay outputs

On the standard I/O board there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added by using the optional Digital I/O Extension Modules. With parameter setting it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready, running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc. It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link. Update cycles in the Control Program
Output RO / standard RO / extension Cycle 50 ms 50 ms

Settings
Parameter Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional Information Value selections and operation times Activation of optional relay outputs

Diagnostics
Actual Value 01.21 01.41 Additional Information Standard relay output states Optional relays output states

Program features

31

Actual signals
Several actual signals are available: Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power Motor speed and torque Supply voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter (h), kWh counter Digital I/O and analog I/O status PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs. Settings
Parameter Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Group 98 OPTION MODULES Additional Information Selection of an actual signal to an analog output Selection of an actual signal to a dataset (serial communication)

Diagnostics
Actual Value Group 01 ACTUAL SIGNALS 09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Additional Information Lists of actual signals

Program features

32

Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up. A motor identification magnetization is automatically done the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications. However, as previously stated, for inline applications, a separate identification run must be performed. Settings Parameter 99.10.

Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Umains fout UDC TM (Nm) (Hz) (VDC) 160 120 80 40 80 60 40 20 520 390 260 130 fout TM UDC

t (s) 1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4 UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive, TM = Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the supply is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.

Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break. The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.

Program features

33

Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay, e.g. the starting of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy. Settings Parameter 21.10.

DC Magnetizing
When DC Magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before the start. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetizing time, it is possible to synchronize the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic Start and DC Magnetizing features cannot be activated at the same time. Settings Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.

DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes. Settings Parameters 21.0422.06.
Motor Speed DC Hold DC hold speed Speed Reference

DC hold speed

Program features

34

Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor Speed No Flux Braking TBr TN (%) 60 40 20 Flux Braking t (s) No Flux Braking f (Hz) 50 HZ/60 Hz TBr = Braking Torque TN = 100 Nm Flux Braking

Braking Torque (%) 120

1

80 Rated Motor Power

1 2 3 4 5

No Flux Braking

40
2 4

2.2 kW 15 kW 37 kW 75 kW 250 kW

0 5 120 80

3 5

10

20

30

40

f (Hz) 50

Flux Braking

40 0 5

3 4 5

10

20

30

40

f (Hz) 50

The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking. Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are: The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it commences braking. The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor. Settings Parameter 26.02.

Program features

35

Flux Optimization
Flux Optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed. Settings Parameter 26.01.

Acceleration and deceleration ramps

It is possible to adjust the acceleration/ deceleration times and the ramp shape. The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S-curve. Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration/deceleration. S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed. Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
Motor speed

Linear S-curve

2 t (s)

Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference. Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.

Program features

36

Speed controller tuning

During the motor identification, the drive speed controller is automatically tuned. It is, however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically, 120%).
n nN

A: Undercompensated B: Normally tuned (autotuning) C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated speed controller

The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative acceleration compensation

Speed reference

+ -

Error value

Proportional, integral

+ +

Torque reference

Derivative Calculated actual speed

Settings Parameter group 23 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS. Diagnostics Actual signal 01.02.

Program features

37

Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct Torque Control is used.
T (%) TN Speed Control Static speed error, % of nN Dynamic speed error No Pulse Encoder + 0.1 to 0.5% (10% of nominal slip) 0.4% sec.* 0.1% sec.* nact-nref nN t (s) 0.1 - 0.4% s TN = rated motor torque nN = rated motor speed nact = actual speed nref = speed reference With Pulse Encoder + 0.01% 100 Tload

*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning.

Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control, when Direct Torque Control is used.
Torque Control Linearity error Repeatability error Torque rise time No Pulse Encoder + 4%* + 3%* 1 to 5 ms With Pulse Encoder + 3% + 1% 1 to 5 ms T (%) TN 100 90 Tref Tact

*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be greater. 10 < 5 ms TN = rated motor torque Tref = torque reference Tact = actual torque t (s)

Program features

38

Scalar Control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved with Scalar Control. It is recommended to activate Scalar Control mode in the following special applications: In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification. If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive. If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes) The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available. Setting Parameter 99.04.

IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR Compensation is active only when the motor control mode is Scalar (see section Scalar Control, above). When IR Compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque. In Direct Torque Control mode, no IR Compensation is possible/needed. Setting Parameter 26.03.
Motor Voltage IR compensation

No compensation f (Hz)

Program features

39

Programmable protection functions

Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes available. The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor. Motor temperature thermal model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions: The motor is at the estimated temperature (value at 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when power is applied to the drive. When power is applied for the first time, the motor is in the ambient temperature of 86 F (30 C). Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 80 F (30 C).
Motor Load 100% Motor Current 150 (%) 100 50 Zero speed load Motor thermal time t Speed

Break point Motor load curve

Temp. Rise 100% 63%

Use of the motor thermistor It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor (PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less than 1.5 kOhm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kOhm. The installation must meet the regulations for protecting against contact. Settings Parameters 30.0430.09. Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 45 and Motor temperature measurement through the analog I/O extension on page 47.

Program features

40

Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition (warning indication / fault indication and stop the drive / no reaction). The torque and current limits, which define the stall limit, must be set according to the maximum load of the used application. When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is below the stall frequency: Fault is activated after the stall time delay. Settings Parameters 30.1030.12. Parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14 (Define the stall limit. Underload Protection Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning indication / fault indication and stop the drive / no reaction). Settings Parameters 30.1330.15. Motor Phase Loss The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive prevents the motor from starting if it detects a missing motor phase. The Phase Loss function also supervises the motor connection status during normal operation. Settings Parameter 30.16. Ground Fault Protection The Ground Fault Protection detects ground faults in the motor or motor cable. The protection is based on sum current measurement. A ground fault in the line supply does not activate the protection. In a grounded supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds. In floating supply networks, the line supply capacitance should be 1 microF or more. The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 1,000 feet (300 meters) do not activate the protection. Ground fault protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.

Program features

41

Note: With parallel connected inverter modules, the ground fault indication is CUR UNBAL xx. See chapter Fault tracing. Settings Parameter 30.17. Communication Fault The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module). Settings Parameters 30.1830.19.

Preprogrammed Faults
Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 3.5 I2hd (rated output current, heavy-duty use rating). DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the supply voltage range. For: 400 V units, U1max is 415 V 500 V units, U1max is 500 V 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is: 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units. DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of the supply voltage range. For: 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is: 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 VDC for 690 V units.

Program features

42

Drive temperature The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. If the inverter module temperature exceeds 240 F (115 C), a warning is given. The temperature trip level is 260 F (125 C). Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 Traditionally, drive temperature monitoring is based on the power semiconductor (IGBT) temperature measurement, which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT temperature limit. However, certain abnormal conditions, such as cooling fan failure, insufficient cooling air flow, or excessive ambient temperature might cause overheating inside the converter module, which the traditional temperature monitoring alone does not detect. The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring improves the protection in these situations. The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current, ambient temperature, and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the converter module. The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load. The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit, and trips when the temperature exceeds the limit by 6 oC. Note: The monitoring is available only for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame size R7 and R8 with Standard Control Program version BHXR3600 (and later versions). Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available: ACS800-Ux-0080-0100-2 -0120-2 -0140-2/3/7 -0170-2/3/5/7 -0210-2/3/5/7 -0230-2 -0260-2/3/5/7 -0270-5 -0300-2/5 -0320-3/5/7 -0400-3/5/7 -0440-3/5/7 -0490-3/5/7 -0550-5/7 -0610-5/7

Program features

43

Settings
Parameter 95.10 Additional Information Ambient temperature

Diagnostics
Warning/Fault INV OVERTEMP Excessive converter module temperature

Short circuit There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given. Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the supply cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%. Ambient temperature The drive will not start if the ambient temperature is below 23 F (-5 C) to 32 F (0 C) or above 163 F (73 C) to 180 F (82 C) (the exact limits vary within the given ranges depending on drive type). Overfrequency If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.

Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and DC voltage. Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS.

Program features

44

Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit. If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited. Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the hardware. For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual.

Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the userdefined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION. Diagnostics
Actual Signals 02.08 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Additional Information Bits in a packed boolean word Indication through a relay output

Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock. Settings Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.

Program features

45

Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

The figure below shows the temperature measurement options of one motor when the standard I/O board is used as the connection interface.
One sensor Motor RMIO board AI1+ AI1T AO1+ AO110 nF (>630 VAC) Three sensors Motor T T T RMIO board AI1+ AI1The minimum voltage of the capacitor must be 630 VAC

AO1+ AO1-

10 nF (>630 VAC)

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the RMIO, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 0.315 (8mm) (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement: The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. Or The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals. See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 39.

Program features

46

Settings
Parameter 15.01 35.0135.03 Other Parameters 13.0113.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.0315.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective. At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Additional Information Analog output in a motor 1 temperature measurement Motor 1 temperature measurement settings

Diagnostics
Actual Values 01.35 02.15 02.18 02.20 Warnings MOTOR 1 TEMP T MEAS ALM Faults MOTOR 1 TEMP ChapterFault tracing and parameter 02.20. Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 02.15. Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 02.15. Additional Information Temperature value Warning bit state Fault bit states Fault bit states

Program features

47

Motor temperature measurement through the analog I/O extension

The figure below shows the temperature measurement options of one motor when an optional Analog I/O Extension Module is used.
One sensor Motor T AO1+ AO110 nF (>630 VAC) Three sensors Motor T T T SHLD RAIO or NAIO module AI1+ AI1The minimum voltage of the capacitor must be 630 VAC RAIO or NAIO module AI1+ AI1-

AO1+ AO1-

10 nF (>630 VAC)

SHLD

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the Analog I/O Extension Module, NAIO or RAIO, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 0.315 (8 mm) (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement: The option module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. Or The temperature sensor must be isolated from the NAIO/RAIO module terminals. See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 39.

Program features

48

Settings
Parameter 35.01335.03 98.12 Other Parameters 13.1613.20 and 15.1115.15 are not effective. At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. The NAIO module must also be connected to a power supply. See the module manual. Additional information Motor 1 temperature measurement Activation of optional analog I/O

Diagnostics
Actual values 01.35 02.15 02.18 02.20 Warnings MOTOR 1 TEMP T MEAS ALM Faults MOTOR 1 TEMP Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 02.20. Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 02.15. Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 02.15. Additional information Temperature value Warning bit state Fault bit state Fault bit state

Program features

49

Adaptive Programming using the function blocks

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customize the operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customizing possible without the need of a special programming tool or language: The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive control program. The control panel is the programming tool. The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets. The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may consist of several separate functions. For more information, see Application Guide for Adaptive Program (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]). DriveAP DriveAP is a Windows based tool for Adaptive Programming. With DriveAP it is possible to upload the Adaptive Program from the drive and edit it on a PC. For more information, see the DriveAP Users Manual [3AFE64540998 (English)].

Program features

50

Program features

51

Master/Follower

General
The Master/Follower function is designed for applications in which the system is run by several ACS800 drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chain, belt etc. Thanks to the Master/Follower function, the load can be evenly distributed between the drives. The external control signals are connected to the Master only. The Master controls the Follower(s) via a fibre optic serial communication link. The Master station is typically speed-controlled and the other drives follow its torque or speed reference. In general, Torque control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled solidly to each other by gearing, a chain etc., so that no speed difference between the drives is possible (see illustration below). Speed control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and the Follower drives are coupled flexibly to each other, so that a slight speed difference between the drives is possible (see illustration below). In some applications, both speed control and torque control of the Followers are required. In those cases an on-the-fly change between speed and torque control can be performed via a digital input of the Follower.
Solidly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled master - Follower follows the torque reference of the master Flexibly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled master - Follower follows the speed reference of the master Follower follows the speed reference of the master Master/Follower Link 3 2

External control signals n Mains 3 Supply 2 Follower Fault Supervision Mains Supply 3

Master/Follower Link 3 2

External control signals n Mains 3 Supply 2 Follower Fault Supervision

Mains Supply

Master/Follower

52

Checklist for a quick start-up

A checklist for the Master/Follower function is given below. Switch off the power supplies of the drives. Wait for five minutes to ensure that the intermediate circuits are discharged. Install RDCO communication boards onto the RMIO boards of all drives to be used in Master/Follower communication (if not already installed). Follow the instructions included in the RDCO package. Build the Master/Follower Link. See section Installation on page 53. Switch ON the power to the drives. On the Master drive, change 70.06 CH2 M/F MODE to MASTER. On the Follower drive(s), adjust the parameters according to your application. Switch all drives to external control with the key on the Control Panel (there should be no L on the first row of the display).
LOC REM

Perform a test run with the motors still de-coupled from the driven machinery. Feed the control signals both through the Master analog/digital inputs and from the Master Control Panel. Check the correct operation of the Master and Follower drives visually (by observing the motor and Control Panel display): - Start, Stop, Direction and Run enable signals given to the Master are received by all drives. - The Master follows the speed reference. - The Follower follows Master speed reference or torque reference. In torque control, the application control restricts the excessive speed rise of the motor. Thus the actual speed of an unloaded Follower is higher than that of the Master, but will not reach the maximum speed limit. Disconnect the Control Panels from the Follower drives to avoid accidental use. See WARNING! below. Switch the power to the drives OFF. Couple the motor shafts to the driven machinery and switch on the power supplies. WARNING! To avoid conflicting control, drives coupled to the same machinery should receive the external control signals only via the Master. General rules: - Connect all external control signals to the Master drive only. - Never control the Follower(s) with the Control Panel or through a fieldbus system.

Master/Follower

53

Installation
WARNING! Before installation, switch off the drive power supply. Wait for five minutes to ensure that the intermediate circuit is discharged. Switch off all dangerous voltages connected from external control circuits to the relay output terminals of the drive.

WARNING! Do not touch the printed circuits. They are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Master/Follower link

T = Transmitter; R = Receiver; RMIO = I/O and Control Board. Please note that channels CH0/CH2/CH3 are located on the optional RDCO-0x board.

The ring configuration can be used in most applications. A parallel connection can also be implemented by using a branching unit. (For more information, contact your local ABB representative.) Handle the fibre optic cables with care. Do not touch the ends with bare hands, as fibre optic cables are extremely sensitive to dirt. Note: For best results, all RDCO boards on the link should be of the same type.

Master/Follower

54

Master/Follower link specification

Size of the Link: One Master and max. 10 Follower stations. If more than 10 followers are required, an ABB representative should be consulted. Transmission medium: Fibre Optic Cable. Construction: Plastic core, diameter 1 mm, sheathed with plastic jacket Attenuation: 0.23 dB/m Maximum Length between Stations: 10 m Other:
Parameter Storage temperature Installation temperature Short term tensile force Short term bend radius Long term bend radius Long term tensile load Flexing 25 35 1 1000 Minimum -65 -20 Maximum +85 +70 50 Unit
o o

C C

N mm mm N cycles

Various lengths of fibre optic cables are available as optional add-on kits. Connectors: Blue - receiver (HP 9534, T-1521); grey - transmitter (HP 9534, R-2521) Serial communication type: Synchronous, full Duplex Transmission rate: 4 Mbit/s Transmission interval: 4 ms Maximum transmission delay: 16 ms Protocol: ABB Distributed Drives Communication System (DDCS)

Master/Follower

55

Application macros

Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control connections of the standard application macros.

Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive, the user can select one of the macros with parameter 99.02. There are four standard macros and two user macros.

Dancer macro
The purpose of dancer regulation is to control the web tension by regulating dancer position. This is achieved using dancer position feedback. The dancer is loaded from either an external source controlled by the customer or an analog output of the drive to produce tension on the web. When using the dancer setpoint functionality of the drive, a 0(4) 20 mA analog output signal is used in conjunction with an I-P (Analog Pressure) Regulator to produce the desired amount of web tension. Web tension variations are absorbed by the dancer and cause the position of the dancer to change. The difference in dancer position feedback and the dancer position setpoint (Max Dancer Travel center point plus any offset) allow the dancer PI regulator to develop the error correction needed to return the dancer to the setpoint position by trimming the speed of the section. The setpoint position for the dancer is defaulted to the center of the total dancer movement. The regulation position can be adjusted by the customer via a parameter. The dancer PI regulator is updated every 10 ms to produce very responsive trim. This allows for very stable dancer position control over the entire speed range.
Fixed Idlers Fixed Idlers

Movable Idler Movable Idler Dancer Dancer

A beneficial feature of a dancer is web storage, which acts like an accumulator to absorb and isolate tension disturbances.

Application macros

56

The drive is speed controlled and uses the dancer position feedback to regulate the web tension to the midpoint. To properly operate in this mode the following parameters must be set up: 62.05 RANGE ADJUST 62.06 TRIM REG REL TO 62.09 DANCER CTL ENABLE - must be active for the PI regulator to operate 62.11 DANCER FDBK INPUT 62.14 MAX DANCER TRAVEL 62.15 CENTER OFFSET If the dancer loading is being controlled by the drive, the following parameters must also be set up: 62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT

Application macros

57

Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Dancer macro(s). The markings of the terminals on the RMIO board are visible.
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3

VREF GND VREF GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 V +24 V DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24 V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 R031 R032 R033

Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kOhm < RL < 10 kOhm Speed Reference 0(2)10 V 1kOhm < RL < 10kOhm Speed reference 0(2)10 V, Rin > 200 kOhm Dancer Fdbk Input. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Dancer Load Setpoint. 0(4) 20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Output Current 0(4) 20 mA = 0 motor nom. current, RL < 700 Ohm Output Speed 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. speed, RL < 700 Ohm Stop/Start By default not In use Dancer Ctrl Enable By default not in use Diameter Reset Fault Reset +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Estop Input Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 24 VDC, 250 mA

rpm A

Ready

Running

Fault

Application macros

58

Tension macro
The purpose of tension regulation is to control the web tension. This is achieved by using loadcell tension feedback. Differences between the tension setpoint and the loadcell feedback allow the tension PI regulator to develop the error correction needed to maintain tension by trimming either speed or torque of the driven section. The tension PI regulator is updated every 10 ms to produce very responsive trim. When running in Speed Trim, the tension regulator is very adaptable to a large variety of web material characteristics and should be used in applications where stall tension is required. An Inline application can optionally be operated in Torque Trim. When running in Torque Trim, an encoder is typically required. If stall tension is required, speed trim is recommended. When using Torque Trim, accurate web material information is required for calculating the inertia torque value of the roll, thus making it less adaptable to a wide variety of materials. However, Torque Trim may result in more stable steady state performance. Open-Loop Tension regulation can be achieved by selecting torque control and Torque No Trim. See 63.15 TENSION MODE and 63.16 MODE TRANSITION. Loadcell feedback is not required in this type of operation. The drive will calculate the required torque based on tension setpoint, roll diameter, frictional losses, and gearing to achieve the proper tension on the Web. In open loop tension mode, the overspeed reference is 50 rpm or 10% of the speed reference (whichever is greater), this is not adjustable. CLOSE LP SPD The drive is speed controlled and uses the loadcell feedback to regulate the web tension to the setpoint. To properly operate in this mode the following parameters must be set up: 63.05 RANGE ADJUST 63.06 TRIM REG REL TO 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE must be active for the PI regulator to operate 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT 63.11 TENSION FDBK INPUT 63.14 MAXIMUM TENSION 63.15 TENSION MODE must be CLOSE LP SPD 63.16 MODE TRANSITION do not want transition to be active

Application macros

59

OPEN LP TORQ The drive is torque controlled with no tension trim. To properly operate in this mode the following parameters must be set up: 60.02 GEAR RATIO 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE must be active to run in torque mode 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT 63.14 MAXIMUM TENSION 63.15 TENSION MODE can be any of the three modes 63.16 MODE TRANSITION if TENSION MODE is not OPEN LP TQ then this must be selected in order to run open loop torque. 63.17 STATIC FRICTION It is also advised to use inertia compensation (Group 64). CLOSE LP TORQ The drive is torque controlled and uses the loadcell feedback to regulate the web tension to the setpoint. To properly operate in this mode the following parameters must be set up: 60.02 GEAR RATIO 63.05 RANGE ADJUST 63.06 TRIM REG REL TO 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE must be active for the PI regulator to operate 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT 63.11 TENSION FDBK INPUT 63.14 MAXIMUM TENSION 63.15 TENSION MODE must be CLOSE LP TORQ 63.16 MODE TRANSITION do not want transition to be active 63.17 STATIC FRICTION It is also advised to use inertia compensation (Group 64).

Application macros

60

Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Tension macro(s). The markings of the terminals on the RMIO board are visible.
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3

VREF GND VREF GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 V +24 V DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24 V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 R031 R032 R033

Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kOhm < RL < 10 kOhm Speed Reference 0(2)10 V 1 kOhm < RL < 10 kOhm Speed reference 0(2)10 V, Rin > 200 kOhm Tension Fdbk Input. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Tension Setpoint. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Output Current 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. current, RL < 700 Ohm Output Speed 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. speed, RL < 700 Ohm Stop/Start By default not in use Tension Ctrl Enable. By default not in use Diameter Reset Fault Reset +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Estop Input Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 24 VDC, 250 mA

rpm A

Ready

Running

Fault

Application macros

61

Draw macro
The purpose of draw is to control web tension by manually trimming the speed of the section. The draw reference can be set from analog inputs, digital inputs or the keypad. If an analog input is selected, 50% of the analog range corresponds to zero draw. To properly operate in this mode, the following parameters must be set: 61.01 DRAW REF SEL 61.02 DRAW W/ TRIM 61.03 DRAW RANGE

Application macros

62

Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Draw macro. The markings of the terminals on the RMIO board are visible.
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3

VREF GND VREF GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 V +24 V DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24 V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 R031 R032 R033

Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kOhm < RL < 10 kOhm Speed Reference 0(2)... 10V 1kOhm < RL < 10kOhm Speed Reference 0(2)10 V, Rin > 200 kOhm By default not in use. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm By default not in use. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Output Current 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. current, RL < 700 Ohm Output Speed 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. speed, RL < 700 Ohm Stop/Start By default not in use By default not in use By default not in use By default not in use Fault Reset +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Estop Input Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 24 VDC, 250 mA

rpm A

Ready

Running

Fault

Application macros

63

Loadshare macro
The purpose of Loadshare macro is to distribute the torque required by a section between the drives connected to that section. The figure below illustrates two basic application types. Only the follower drive(s) in the section would select the Loadshare macro; however, both master and follower drives have parameters that must be configured:
Solidly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled master - Follower follows the torque reference of the master Flexibly coupled motor shafts: - Speed-controlled master - Follower follows the speed reference of the master Follower follows the speed reference of the master Master/Follower Link 3 2

External control signals n Mains 3 Supply 2 Follower Fault Supervision Mains Supply 3

Master/Follower Link 3 2

External control signals n Mains 3 Supply 2 Follower Fault Supervision

Mains Supply

Follower Drive: 65.01 LDSH ADJ SEL 65.02 LDSH RANGE +/70.06 CH2 M/F MODE 70.10 M/F COMM DELAY 70.11 CH2 COM LOSS CTRL Master Drive: 70.06 CH2 M/F MODE 70.07 MASTER SIGNAL 1 70.08 MASTER SIGNAL 2 70.09 MASTER SIGNAL 3

Application macros

64

Default control connections The figure below shows the external control connections for the Loadshare macro. The markings of the terminals on the RMIO board are visible.
X20 1 2 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X23 1 2 X25 1 2 3 X26 1 2 3 X27 1 2 3

VREF GND VREF GND AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2AI3+ AI3AO1+ AO1AO2+ AO2DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 +24 V +24 V DGND1 DGND2 DIIL +24 V GND RO11 RO12 RO13 RO21 RO22 RO23 R031 R032 R033

Reference voltage -10 VDC 1 kOhm < RL < 10 kOhm Speed Reference 0(2)... 10V 1kOhm < RL < 10kOhm By default not in use 0(2)10 V, Rin > 200 kOhm By default not in use. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm By default not in use. 0(4)20 mA, Rin = 100 Ohm Output Current 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. current, RL < 700 Ohm Output Speed 0(4)20 mA = 0motor nom. speed, RL < 700 Ohm Stop/Start By default not in use By default not in use By default not in use By default not in use Fault Reset +24 VDC, max. 100 mA Digital ground Digital ground Estop Input Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 24 VDC, 250 mA

rpm A

Ready

Running

Fault

Application macros

65

User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two User macros. The User macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also saved. To create User macro 1: 1. Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet. 2. Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by changing 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes 20 s to 1 min. Note: If user macro save function is executed several times, drive memory fills up and file compression starts. File compression can last up to 10 minutes. Macro saving will be completed after the file compression. (Operation is indicated on the last row of the control panel display by blinking dots). To recall the User macro: 1. Change 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO to USER 1 LOAD. 2. Press ENTER to load. The User macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG). Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used. Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.

Application macros

66

Application macros

67

Actual signals and parameters

Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters. The fieldbus equivalent value is given for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional data: actual signals and parameters.

Terms and abbreviations

The table defines the terms and abbreviations used in the parameter and actual signal tables.
Term Absolute Maximum Frequency Absolute Maximum Speed Actual signal FbEq Parameter Definition Value of 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit. Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. No user setting possible. Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.

Actual signals and parameters

68

No.

Name Value

Description Basic signals for monitoring of the drive. Calculated motor speed in rpm. 100% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Calculated output frequency. Measured motor current. Calculated motor torque. 100% is the motor nominal torque. Motor power. 100% is the nominal power. Measured intermediate circuit voltage. Calculated supply voltage. Calculated motor voltage. Calculated IGBT temperature. 100% is the trip point. Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. kWh counter. Application code load. Value of analog input AI1. Value of analog input AI2 Value of analog input AI3 Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energized, RO2 and RO3 are de-energized. Value of analog output AO1. Value of analog output AO2. Value of output 1 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Value of output 2 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Measured temperature of motor 1. See 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL. Measured temperature of motor 2. See 35.04 MTR2 TEMP SEL. Estimated motor temperature. Value of input 1 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Value of input 2 of the Analog I/O Extension module (optional). Status of digital inputs of the Digital I/O Extension modules (optional). Status of digital outputs of the Digital I/O Extension modules (optional). Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Running time of the drive cooling fan. Note: The counter can be reset by the DriveWindow PC tool. Resetting is recommended when the fan is replaced.

FbEq

01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.02 MOTOR SPEED FILT 01.03 FREQUENCY 01.04 CURRENT 01.05 TORQUE 01.06 POWER 01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE 01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE 01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 01.10 ACS800 TEMP 01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER 01.15 KILOWATT HOURS 01.16 APPL CODE DUTY 01.17 DI6-1 STATUS 01.18 AI1 [V] 01.19 AI2 [mA] 01.20 AI3 [mA] 01.21 RO3-1 STATUS 01.22 AO1 [mA] 01.23 AO2 [mA] 01.28 AO3 [mA] 01.29 AO4 [mA] 01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP 01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST 01.38 AI5 [mA] 01.39 AI6 [mA] 01.40 DI7-12 STATUS 01.41 RO4-7 STATUS 01.43 MOTOR RUN-TIME 01.44 FAN ON-TIME

200 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1 A 100 = 1% 10 = 1% 1 = 1 VDC 1 = 1 VAC 1 = 1 VAC 10 = 1% 1=1h 1 = 100 kWh 1 = 1% 1000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1=1 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1 = 1 oC 1 = 1 oC 1 = 1 oC 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1=1 1=1 1 = 10 h 1 = 10 h

Status of digital inputs. Example: 000001 = DI1 is on, DI2DI6 are off. 1 = 1

01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP

Control board temperature. Speed and torque reference monitoring signals and data words for fieldbus signal monitoring. Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM.

1 = 1 oC

02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2

200 = 1%

Actual signals and parameters

69

No.

Name Value

Description Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM.

FbEq 200 = 1%

02.02 SPEED REF 3 02.03 SPEED REF 4

Sum of 02.02 SPEED REF 3 and 25.03 SPEED CORRECTION. 100% 200 = 1% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Final speed reference for the internal speed controller. 100% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. 200 = 1%

02.04 SPEED USED REF

02.05 SPEED ESTIMATED 02.06 SPEED MEASURED

200 = 1%

Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is used). 100% 200 = 1% corresponds to 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM. Filtered motor torque. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 100 = 1% Limited sum of M/F torque reference and external torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Internal torque reference; after the torque reference selector. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Sum of 02.10 TORQ REF 3 and 24.08 LOAD COMPENSATION. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Sum of 02.11 TORQ REF 4 and 24.09 TORQUE TRIM. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Final torque reference for the internal torque controller. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. Flux reference in percent. A 16-bit data word. See Table 9 on page 150. A 16-bit data word. See Table 10 on page 150. A 16-bit data word. See Table 11 on page 151. A 16-bit data word. See Table 12 on page 151. A 16-bit data word. See Table 13 on page 152. A 16-bit data word. See Table 14 on page 152. A 16-bit data word. See Table 15 on page 153. A 16-bit data word. See Table 16 on page 154. A 16-bit data word. See Table 17 on page 155. A 16-bit data word. See Table 3 on page 145. A 16-bit data word. See Table 18 on page 155. A 16-bit data word. See Table 5 on page 147. A 16-bit data word. See Table 7 on page 149. A 16-bit data word. See Table 6 on page 148. Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the codes. Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault. Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault. Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault. 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 10 = 1% 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1

02.07 MOTOR TORQUE FILT 02.08 TORQ REF 1 02.09 TORQ REF 2 02.10 TORQ REF 3 02.11 TORQ REF 4 02.12 TORQ REF 5 02.13 TORQ USED REF 02.14 ACTUAL MTR FLUX 02.15 ALARM WORD 1 02.16 ALARM WORD 2 02.17 ALARM WORD 3 02.18 FAULT WORD 1 02.19 FAULT WORD 2 02.20 FAULT WORD 3 02.21 SYSTEM FAULT 02.22 INT FAULT INFO 02.23 LIMIT WORD 1 02.24 MAIN CTRL WORD 02.25 FOLLOWER MCW 02.26 MAIN STATUS WORD 02.27 AUX STATUS WORD 02.28 AUX STATUS WORD 4 02.31 1. LATEST FAULT 02.32 2. LATEST FAULT 02.33 3. LATEST FAULT 02.34 4. LATEST FAULT

Actual signals and parameters

70

No.

Name Value

Description Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault. Fieldbus code of the latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning. Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning. A 16-bit data word. See Table 19 on page 156. The dv/dt of MOTOR SPEED FILT. Application signals for process monitoring. Percentage of speed adjustment due to the draw reference. Total percentage of speed adjustment for progressive draw systems.

FbEq 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1 = 1 rpm/s

02.35 5. LATEST FAULT 02.36 LATEST WARNING 02.37 2. LATEST WARNING 02.38 3. LATEST WARNING 02.39 4. LATEST WARNING 02.40 5. LATEST WARNING 02.41 LIMIT WORD INV 02.42 MTR ACCELERATION

03 ACTUAL SIGNALS
03.01 DRAW SETPOINT 03.02 TOTAL DRAW TRIM 03.03 DANCER LOAD SETPT 03.04 DANCER LOAD REF 03.05 DANCER REG OUTPUT 03.06 DANCER POSITION 03.07 TENSION SETPOINT 03.08 TENSION REFERENCE 03.09 TENSION REG OUTPT 03.10 TENSION ACTUAL 03.11 TEN CALC TORQ REF 03.12 CALC TTL INERTIA 03.15 PACK STATUS BITS

100 = 1% 100 = 1%

Dancer cylinder setpoint from an analog input. Used for setting desired 10 = 1% web tension. A 16-bit data word. Dancer / Tension setpoint (see 62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT and 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT). Percentage output of the dancers PI regulator. Position of travel for the dancer arm. Tension setpoint from analog input. Tension reference. Comprised of 03.07 TENSION SETPOINT and stall tension settings. Percentage output of the tensions PI regulator Tension actual as measured by the loadcell. Torque reference calculated from the 03.08 TENSION REFERENCE and shaft diameter. Total calculated section inertia. A 16-bit data word. See Table 9 on page 150. Words for monitoring data received from fieldbus. A 16-bit data word. See Table 4 on page 146. A 16-bit data word. See Table 2 on page 143. A 16-bit data word. See Table 5 on page 147. A 16-bit data word. Dancer/Tension setpoint (see 62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT and 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT). A 16-bit data word. See 90.05 DATA 3 WORD 2. A 16-bit data word. Draw reference amount (see 61.01 DRAW REF SEL). A 16-bit data word. Percent Draw Trim for progressive. Draw from overriding controller. A 16-bit data word. See 90.08 DATA 5 WORD 2. A 16-bit data word. See 90.09 DATA 5 WORD 3. 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 10 = 1% 10 = 1% 10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch 10 = 1N 10 = 1 lb 10 = 1 N 10 = 1 lb 10 = 1% 10 = 1 N 10 = 1 lb 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 kgm2 1 = 1 lbft2 1=1

06 CH0 DATASETS IN
06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 06.02 DATASET 1 WORD 2 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 06.04 DATASET 3 WORD 1 06.05 DATASET 3 WORD 2 06.06 DATASET 3 WORD 3 06.07 DATASET 5 WORD 1 06.08 DATASET 5 WORD 2 06.09 DATASET 5 WORD 3

Actual signals and parameters

71

No.

Name Value

Description Signals for the Adaptive Program, Value of analog input AI1 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI2 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI3 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI5 scaled to an integer value. Value of analog input AI6 scaled to an integer value. A 16-bit data word. Line-side converter signal selected by 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL. A 16-bit data word. Line-side converter signal selected by 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL. The sources for external start, stop and direction control Defines the connections and the source of the start and stop commands for external control location 1. This function is not selected. Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if DI1 = 1. Pulse start through DI1. Transition from 0 to 1 = start. Pulse stop through DI2. Transition from 1 to 0 = stop. See selection DI1.

FbEq

09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 AI1 SCALED 09.02 AI2 SCALED 09.03 AI3 SCALED 09.04 AI5 SCALED 09.05 AI6 SCALED 09.06 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 09.07 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2

2000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1=1 1=1

10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP NOT SEL DI1 DI1P,2P DI7 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV FBA & DI1 MSTR & DI1 FBA & MSTR PARAM 10.05 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION FORWARD DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 D12 AI5

1 2 3 4

See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 5 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 03. See chapter Fieldbus control Starts and stops with the master drive. Starts if DI1 and FIELDBUS = 1. Stops if DI1 or FIELDBUS = 0. Starts if DI1 = 1 and MASTER DRV starts. Stops if DI1 = 0 or MASTER DRV stops. 6 7 8

Starts if FIELDBUS = 1 and MASTER DRV starts. Stops if FIELDBUS 9 = 0 or MASTER DRV stops. Source selected by 10.05 EXT 1 STRT PTR. Enables the control of direction of rotation of the motor, or fixes the directIon. Fixed to forward. If digital input DI2 = 1, the direction is reverse. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See Selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Direction will reverse if the speed reference is negative; SPD REF SELECT must be AI5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10

Actual signals and parameters

72

No.

Name Value FIELDBUS

Description

FbEq

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 04. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines the connections and the source of the start and stop commands for external control location 2. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. See 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. Source selected by 10.06 EXT 2 STRT PTR. Enables the control of direction of rotation of the motor, or fixes the directIon. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. See 10.02 EXT1 DIRECTION. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.05 of 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10.03 EXT2 STRT/STOP NOT SEL DI1 DI1P,2P DI7 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV FBA & DI1 MSTR & DI1 FBA & MSTR PARAM 10.06 10.04 EXT2 DIRECTION FORWARD DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 AI5 FIELDBUS 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or constant value: / C.-32768C.32767 - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. 10.06 EXT2 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 10.06 of 10.03 EXT2 STRT/STOP.

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

External control location selection and external reference sources and limits. Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.

Actual signals and parameters

73

No.

Name Value EXT1 EXT2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS PARAM 11.11

Description EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STOP and 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by 10.03 EXT2 STRT/STOP and 11.06 EXT2 REF SELECT. Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1= EXT2. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.

FbEq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 15 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 11. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 11.11 EXT1/EXT2 SEL PTR Select the required source for the Web Speed (Material speed) e.g. AI or Fieldbus. The Analog Input should be scaled to be 100% at maximum line speed (10 VDC), if AI (voltage input) is used, and 20 mA if AI (current input) is used. For example, AI1 should be 10 VDC at 1000 ft/min (304.8 m/min) line speed, if 1000 ft/min (304.8 m/min) is the maximum line speed. 16

11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT

KEYPAD AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5

Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value. Analog input AI1 (voltage). Analog input AI2 (current). Analog input AI3 (current). Analog input AI5 (voltage or current). If joystick operation is desired, set EXT1 DIRECTION to AI5. With this done, when the input is less than 0 VDC, the direction is reverse. When the input is greater than 0 VDC, the direction is forward. Analog input AI6 (voltage or current). 06.02 DATASET 1 WORD 2. See chapter Fieldbus control. Follows the speed reference of the master drive. Digital Input 3: Reference increase Digital Input 4: Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or power switch). 11.09 DIG POT RATE1 sec and 11.10 DIG POT RATE2 sec define the rate of change.

1 2 3 4 5

AI6 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV *A11 DI3, DI4

6 7 8 9

FBUS b4,5

See selection DI3, DI4. Instead of a digital input, the commands come 10 from 06.02 DATASET1 WORD 2, bits 4 and 5. See chapter Fieldbus control. Follows the speed reference from the Master Drive multiplied by AI1. 11

MASTER DRIVE *AI1

Actual signals and parameters

74

No.

Name Value PARAM 11.12

Description Source selected by 11.12 EXT1 REF PTR. Defines the minimum value for external reference 1 (absolute value). Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal. EXT REF1 Range 2 1 2 1 2 13.01 MINIMUM AI1 10 VDC / 20 mA 11.04 EXT1 REF MINIMUM 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM

FbEq 12

11.04 EXT1 REF MINIMUM

Nmotor Nshaft 1 1 2

AI1 Range

Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of parameter 11.03 is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond the AI minimum and maximum settings as above. Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analog signal. See chapter Fieldbus control for more information. 018000 rpm Setting range in rpm. (Hz if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) 1 = 1 rpm

Actual signals and parameters

75

No.

Name Value

Description EXT1 REF MAXIMUM may be calculated from the formula shown below. However, it is strongly advised to reconfirm the calculated value during the startup. A procedure to experimentally reconfirm parameter 11.05 is described in steps 16. Parameter 11:05 defines the maximum rotational speed in rpm. This parameter is used as an intermediate scaling factor to scale the Web Speed or Material speed to a rotational speed reference for the drive. Lmax x Z Parameter 11.05 (rpm) = Dx Where: Lmax= Maximum Line Speed in ft/min or m/min D = Roll diameter in ft (m) = 3.1415 Z= Gear Ratio Gear Ratio (Z) = NMOTOR / NSHAFT Calculation of rotational speed reference from web speed (material speed) in the control program: Lact x Z = Dx = = = Analog Input x Lmax 100 x Z Dx x Z Dx

FbEq

11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM

Analog Input x 11.05 x x D 100 x Z Analog Input x 11.05 100

The factor Speed Share (Speed Multiplier) is used to scale the line speed reference input to the rpm reference of the drive. 1. If Group 61 is being utilized, ensure that 61.01 DRAW REF SEL is set to NO DRAW. 2. Put the drive in speed mode only, disable the tension and dancer command (depending on selected operating mode). 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE to NOT SEL or 62.09 DANCER CTL ENABLE to NOT SEL. This sets the trim amount to zero so the section will follow the line speed reference. 3. Ensure ALL SAFETY conditions are met to safely operate the production line (machinery). 4. Without web in the machine, place the line in run and slowly increase the line speed to approximately 50%. 5. Check the surface speed of sections with a tachometer (handtach). Then without changing speeds, check the surface speed of the inline roll. 6. Adjust 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM to match the roll surface speed to the line speed. Note: 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED must be greater than 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM or the speed of the section will be limited to MAXIMUM SPEED. 018000 rpm See description for EXT1 REF MINIMUM range. 1 = 1 rpm

Actual signals and parameters

76

No.

Name Value

Description Select the required source for the Web Speed (Material speed) e.g. AI or Fieldbus. The Analog Input should be scaled to be 100% at maximum line speed (10 VDC if AI (voltage input) is used and 20 mA if AI (current input) is used. For example, AI2 should be 10 VDC at 1000 ft/min (304.8 m/min) line speed if 1000 ft/min (304.8 m/min) is the maximum line speed. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. Source selected by 11.13 EXT2 REF PTR Defines the minimum value for external reference 2 (absolute value). Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal. See 11.04 EXT1 REF MINIMUM. See 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. See 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. Defines the rate of speed reference change when DI3 or DI4 or Fbus b4, 5 are high for 3 seconds or less. Setting range Defines the rate of speed reference change when DI3 or DI4 or Fbus b4, 5 are high for more than 3 seconds. Setting range Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.11 of 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

FbEq

11.06 EXT2 REF SELECT

KEYPAD AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV DI3, DI4 FBUS b4,5 MASTER DRIVE xAI1 PARAM 11.13 11.07 EXT2 REF MINIMUM 018000 rpm 11.08 EXT2 REF MAXIMUM 018000 rpm 11.09 DIG POT RATE1 sec 1300 11.10 DIG POT RATE2 sec 1300 11.11 EXT1/EXT2 SEL PTR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 = 1 rpm 1 = 1 rpm

1=1

1=1

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference 11.12 EXT1 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.12 of 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference 11.13 EXT2 REF PTR -255.255.3+255.255.31 / C.-32768C.32767 Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 11.13 of 11.06 EXT2 REF SELECT Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for information on the difference. Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference (unless otherwise indicated). Selects the activation signal source for the ramped constant speeds. This function is not selected. Digital input DI3 = 1 selects CONST SPD 1.

12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL DI3

1 2

Actual signals and parameters

77

No.

Name Value DI3, DI4 DI5 DI5, DI6 DI7 DI7, DI8 DI9 DI9, DI10 DI11 DI11, DI12 FIELDBUS

Description Digital input DI3 = 1 selects CONST SPD 1. Digital input DI4 = 1 selects CONST SPD 2. See selection DI3. See selection DI3, DI4. See selection DI3. See selection DI3, DI4. See selection DI3. See selection DI3, DI4. See selection DI3. See selection DI3, DI4. See selection DI3, DI4. Instead of digital inputs, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bits 05 and 06. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines ramped speed 1. Setting range. Defines ramped speed 2. Setting range. Selects the activation signal source for the stepped constant speed. This function is not selected. Digital input DI2 = 1 selects INCH SPD 1. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 08. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines stepped speed 1. Setting range. Selects the activation signal source for the stepped constant speed that is added to external speed reference. Note: This constant speed does not override the speed reference; it is added to the speed reference.

FbEq 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

12.02 CONST SPD 1 +11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 12.03 CONST SPD 2 +11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 12.04 INCH SPD SEL NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS 12.05 INCH SPD 1 +11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 12.06 TAKE-UP / PAYOUT

10 = 1 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 = 1 rpm

NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5

This function is not selected. Digital input DI2 = 1 selects 12.07 SPEED CHANGE. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

1 2 3 4 5

Actual signals and parameters

78

No.

Name Value DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS PARAM 12.09

Description See selection DI2. See selection DI2 See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 09. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 12.09 TAKEUP/PAYOUT PTR Defines take-up/payout speed adder. Setting range. Selects if the drive is to start when the digital inputs used in 12.01 CONST SPEED SEL = 1 or if the run command is required. A separate run command is required to start the drive. The drive starts when the constant speed digital input = 1. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 12.09 of 12.06 TAKE-UP / PAYOUT

FbEq 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 = 1 rpm

12.07 SPEED CHANGE +11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 12.08 CNST SPD RUN SEL MNSTRT REQ STRT W/CNST 12.09 TAKEUP/PAYOUT PTR

0 1

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

13 ANALOG INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1

The analog input signal processing Defines the minimum value for analog input AI1. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference 1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.

0V 2V TUNED VALUE TUNE

Zero Volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. Two Volts The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: - Connect the minimum signal to input. - Set the parameter to TUNE. Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 V to 10 V.

1 2 3 4

13.03 SCALE AI1

Scales analog input AI1. Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when: - 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM = 1500 rpm - Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value) - 13.03 SCALE AI = 100% 40% 10 V

AI1 1500 rpm

600 rpm

0V

Actual signals and parameters

79

No.

Name Value 50150%

Description Scaling range. Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1. % Unfiltered Signal O = I (1 - e-t/T) I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant t

FbEq 1 = 1%

13.04 FILTER AI1 ms

63

Filtered Signal

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter. 010000 13.05 INVERT AI1 NO YES 13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 4 mA TUNED VALUE TUNE Filter time constant. Activates/deactivates the inversion of the analog input AI1. No inversion Inversion active. The maximum value of the analog input signal corresponds to the minimum reference and vice versa. Defines the minimum value for analog input AI2. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Zero milliAmps. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. Four milliAmps. The value measured by the tuning function. See selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: - Connect the minimum signal to input. - Set the parameter to TUNE. Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 mA to 20 mA. 13.08 SCALE AI2 13.09 FILTER AI2 ms 13.10 INVERT AI2 13.11 MINIMUM AI3 13.13 SCALE AI3 13.14 FILTER AI3 ms 13.15 INVERT AI3 13.16 MINIMUM AI5 See 13.03 SCALE AI1. See 13.04 FILTER AI1. See 13.05 INVERT AI1. See 13.06 MINIMUM AI2. See 13.03 SCALE AI1. See 13.04 FILTER AI1. See 13.05 INVERT AI1. Defines the minimum value for analog input AI5. When used as a reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting. Example: If AI5 is selected as the source for external reference 1, this value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04 EXT1 REF MINIMUM. 0V TUNED VALUE TUNE Zero Volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analog input signal. The value measured by the tuning function. See selection TUNE. The value measurement triggering. Procedure: 1. 2. Connect the minimum signal to input. Set the parameter to TUNE. 2 3 1 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 0 or 65535 14 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 0 or 65535 2 3 4 1 0 65535 1 = 1 ms

Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 mA to 20 mA.

Actual signals and parameters

80

No.

Name Value

Description See 13.03 SCALE AI1. See 13.04 FILTER AI1. See 13.05 INVERT AI1. See 13.16 MINIMUM AI5. See 13.03 SCALE AI1. See 13.04 FILTER AI1. See 13.05 INVERT AI1. Status information indicated through relay outputs. The relay output is controlled by use of pointers. This parameter selects the word that the desired bit is packed in. Example: +.002.026.01 = Main Status Wd bit 1 (ready).

FbEq 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 0 or 65535 13 1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 0 or 65535

13.18 SCALE AI5 13.19 FILTER AI5 ms 13.20 INVERT AI5 13.21 MINIMUM AI6 13.23 SCALE AI6 13.24 FILTER AI6 ms 13.25 INVERT AI6

14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RO1 POINTER

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for the relay output RO1. The figure below illustrates the operation and release delays for relay output RO1. Drive status 1 0 RO1 status 1 0

tOn tOn tOff 0.019999.00 s 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.019999.00 s 14.05 RO2 POINTER 14.07 RO2 TON DELAY 14.08 RO2 TOFF DELAY 14.09 RO3 POINTER 14.11 RO3 TON DELAY 14.12 RO3 TOFF DELAY 14.13 RO4 POINTER 14.15 RO5 POINTER 14.17 RO6 POINTER 14.19 RO7 POINTER Setting range.

tOff 14.03 14.04

tOn

tOff

time

1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s 1=1s -

Defines the release delay for the relay output RO1. Setting range. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY. See 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.03 RO1 TON DELAY. See 14.04 RO1 TOFF DELAY. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. See 14.01 RO1 POINTER. The analog output signal processing The analog output is controlled by use of pointers. This parameter selects the word that is the desired output. Example: +.001.002.00 = MOTOR SPEED FILT. -

15 ANALOG OUTPUTS
15.01 AO1 POINTER

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

Actual signals and parameters

81

No.

Name Value 0 mA 4 mA 10 mA

Description Defines the minimum value of the analog output signal AO1. Zero mA. Four mA. Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1. % O = I (1 - e-t/T) Unfiltered Signal 100 63 Filtered Signal t T Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters. I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant

FbEq 1 2

15.03 MINIMUM AO1

Ten mA. 50% offset on 0 to 20 mA for testing or indication of direction. 3

15.04 FILTER AO1 ms

0 10000 ms 15.05 NOM VALUE AO1 065535 15.06 AO2 POINTER 15.08 MINIMUM AO2 15.09 FILTER AO2 ms 15.10 NOM VALUE AO2 15.11 AO3 POINTER 15.13 MINIMUM AO3 15.14 FILTER AO3 ms 15.15 NOM VALUE AO3 15.16 AO4 POINTER 15.18 MINIMUM AO4 15.19 FILTER AO4 ms 15.20 NOM VALUE AO4

Filter time constant When the value of the signal selected in ANALOG OUTPUT 1 equals this parameter, the output = 20 mA. Setting range. See 15.01 AO1 POINTER. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 NOM VALUE AO1. See 15.01 AO1 POINTER. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 NOM VALUE AO1. See 15.01 AO1 POINTER. See 15.03 MINIMUM AO1. See 15.04 FILTER AO1 ms. See 15.05 NOM VALUE AO1. Run enable, parameter lock, etc. Sets the run enable signal on, or selects a source for the external run enable signal. If no run enable signal is on, the drive will not start or stops if it is running. Run enable signal is on. External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = run enable. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.

1 = 1 ms

10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1 13 1 = 1 ms 10 = 1

16 SYS CTRL INPUTS

16.01 RUN ENABLE

YES DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Actual signals and parameters

82

No.

Name Value DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV

Description See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 00. See chapter Fieldbus control. The run enable signal comes from the master drive. Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing. The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid Pass Code. Selects the pass code for the parameter lock.

FbEq 10 11 12 13 14 15

16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN LOCKED 16.03 PASS CODE 030000 16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL DI2

0 65535

Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. 1 = 1 Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists. Fast reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). Reset through digital input DI2 or by control panel: - If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI2 - If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control panel. 1 2

DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS MASTER DRV 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG

See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 07 See chapter Fieldbus control. The reset signal comes from the master drive. The master drive must be stopped (not in RUN). Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the change, the drive will not start. Note: Always save the User Macro by 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO after changing any parameters settings, or re-performing the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched OFF and ON again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost. Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting once made remains despite the User Macro change.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

NOT SEL

User macro change is not possible through a digital input.

Actual signals and parameters

83

No.

Name Value DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS

Description Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Instead of a digital input, the selection comes from 06.01 DATASET 1 WORD 1 bit 01. See chapter Fieldbus control. Disables entering to local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel). WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!

FbEq 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

16.06 LOCAL LOCK

OFF ON 16.07 PARAMETER SAVE

Local control allowed. Local control disabled. Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory. Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.

0 65535

DONE SAVE 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY

Saving started. Saving is done. Defines the source of the control board power supply. Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL, the drive trips to a fault at power switch off.

0 1

INTERNAL 24V EXTERNAL 24V

Internal. External. The control board is powered from an external supply. Drive operation limits. Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. WARNING! The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also change.

1 2

20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED

-18000 / (no. of pole pairs) MAXIMUM SPEED 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Minimum speed limit.

20000 = 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX

Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. WARNING! The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e. 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also change.

Actual signals and parameters

84

No.

Name Value

Description

FbEq 20000 = 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX

MINIMUM SPEED 18000 Maximum speed limit / (no. of pole pairs) 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT 0.0x.x A 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.0600.0% 20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL Defines the allowed maximum motor current in percent of the rated heavy-duty use output current (I2hd). Current limit. Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If a braking chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation. OFF ON 20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL Overvoltage control deactivated. Overvoltage control activated. Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan. OFF ON 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ -300.00MAXIMUM FREQ 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ MINIMUM FREQ300.00 Hz 20.10 SET MIN TORQ -600.00.0% 20.11 P MOTORING LIM 0.0600.0% 20.12 P GENERATING LIM -600.00.0% 20.13 MIN TORQ SEL Undervoltage control deactivated. Undervoltage control activated. Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set only if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. Minimum frequency limit. Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction. Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set only if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. Maximum frequency limit. Minimum negative output torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque. Setting range. Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.

10 = 1 A 100 = 1%

0 65535

0 65535

100 = 1 Hz

100 = 1 Hz

100 = 1%

Maximum motoring power limit in percent of the motor nominal power. 100 = 1% Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter. Maximum generating power limit in percent of the motor nominal power. Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. 100 = 1%

Actual signals and parameters

85

No.

Name Value MIN LIM1 DI1

Description Value of 20.15 TORQ MIN LIM 1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of 20.15 TORQ MIN LIM 1 1: Value of 20.16 TORQ MIN LIM 2. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1.

FbEq 1 2

DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PARAM 20.18 NEG MAX TORQ 20.14 MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 DI1

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Analog input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted 14 to a torque limit. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Limit given by 20.18 TORQ MIN PTR. Inverted maximum torque limit defined by 20.14 MAX TORQ SEL. Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive. Value of 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE. Digital input DI1. 0: Value of 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE. 1: Value of 20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. See selection DI1. Analog input AI1. See 20.20 MIN AI SCALE on how the signal is converted to a torque limit. See selection AI1. See selection AI1. 1 2 15 16 17 18 19 20

DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 AI1 AI2 AI3

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Actual signals and parameters

86

No.

Name Value AI5 AI6 PARAM 20.19

Description See selection AI1. See selection AI1. Limit given by 20.19 TORQ MAX PTR. Defines the minimum torque limit 1 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. Defines the minimum torque limit 2 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive. Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. Defines the source or constant for value PARAM 20.18 of 20.13 MIN TORQ SEL.

FbEq 17 18 19 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1%

20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 -600.00.0% 20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 -600.00.0% 20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 0.0600.0% 20.18 TORQ MIN PTR

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1/ STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 20.19 TORQ MAX PTR Defines the source or constant for value PARAM 20.19 of 20.14 MAX TORQ SEL.

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1/ STRT PTR for /C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 20.20 MIN AI SCALE Defines how an analog signal (mA or V) is converted to a torque minimum or maximum limit (%). The figure below illustrates the converting, when analog input AI1 has been set as the source for a torque limit by parameter 20.13 or 20.14. Torque limit 20.21 13.01 10 VDC 20.20 20.21 Minimum setting for AI1 Maximum setting for AI1 Minimum torque Maximum torque

20.20 13.01 0.0600.0% 20.21 MAX AI SCALE 0.0600.0% 10 VDC Analog signal 100 = 1%

%-value that corresponds to the minimum setting of the analog input. See 20.20 MIN AI SCALE.

%-value that corresponds to the maximum setting of the analog input. 100 = 1% Start and stop modes of the motor. Selects the motor starting method. Also see section Automatic Start on page 33. Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions. Note: In scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR), no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default. 1

21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO

Actual signals and parameters

87

No.

Name Value DC MAGN

Description DC magnetizing should be selected if a high break-away torque is required. The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before the start. The pre-magnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected. Note: DC magnetizing cannot be selected in scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR).

FbEq 2

CNST DCMAGN

Constant DC magnetizing should be selected instead of DC 3 magnetizing if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough. The premagnetizing time is defined by 21.02 CONST MAGN TIME. Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected. Note: DC magnetizing cannot be selected in scalar control mode (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR). WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed. Ensure always in applications where a full breakaway torque is essential, that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.

21.02 CONST MAGN TIME

Defines the magnetizing time in the constant magnetizing mode. See 21.01 START FUNCTION. After the start command, ACS800 automatically pre-magnetizes the motor the set time. Magnetizing time. To ensure full magnetizing, set this value to the 1 = 1 ms same value as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below: Motor Rated Power < 10 kW 10 to 200 kW 200 to 1000 kW Constant Magnetizing Time > 100 to 200 ms > 200 to 1000 ms > 1000 to 2000 ms

30.010000.0

21.03 STOP FUNCTION RAMP STOP COAST STOP

Selects the motor stop function. Stop along a ramp defined by the active deceleration time. See parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop. 0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

88

No.

Name Value

Description Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if the value of 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. When both the reference and the speed drop below 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06 DC HOLD CURR. When the reference speed exceeds parameter 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED, normal drive operation continues. SPEEDmotor DC Hold

FbEq

21.04 DC HOLD

t Ref. DC HOLD SPEED t Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off. Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor. See section DC Hold on page 33. NO YES YES - NO RUN 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 03600 rpm 21.06 DC HOLD CURR 0.0100.0% 21.07 HOLD AT ZERO TIME 099999 s 21.09 E-STOP MODE STOP RAMPING Function inactive. Function active. Function is active at zero speed for 21.07 HOLD AT ZERO TIME. Defines the DC Hold speed. See 21.04 DC HOLD. Speed in rpm. Defines the DC hold current. See 21.04 DC HOLD. Current in percent of the motor nominal current. Defines the time that DC Hold is active once zero speed is reached. Setting range. The drive stopping method when an e-stop command has been received. The drive ramps to zero speed in the time set by 22.07 E-STOP RAMP TIME. When the drive reaches zero speed it will turn off (remove RUN). The drive decelerates to zero speed at torque limit. When the drive reaches zero speed it will turn off (remove RUN). The drive coasts to a stop (immediate removal of RUN). 1 1=1s 1 = 1% 1 = 1 rpm 1 2 3

STOP TORQ COAST STOP

2 3

Actual signals and parameters

89

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the delay for zero speed delay function. The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position. No Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Controller switched off: Motor coasts to stop Zero Speed Time No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill. With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero speed function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetized, and the drive is ready for a quick start. With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Controller remains live. Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed Zero Speed Delay Time

FbEq

21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY

0.060.0 s 21.11 E-STOP COAST DLY 0.0100.0 s

Delay time. Time allowed for the drive to stop after an e-stop command is received before an internal coast stop is commanded. Setting range. Acceleration and deceleration times. See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 35. Selects the active acceleration / deceleration time pair. Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 and 22.03 DECEL TIME 1. Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See 22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 and 22.05 DECEL TIME 2.

10 = 1 s

10 = 1 s

22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 2 DI2

1 2

Acceleration/Deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI2. 3 0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in use. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See Selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12

Actual signals and parameters

90

No.

Name Value FIELDBUS

Description

FbEq

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 14. See chapter Fieldbus control. Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change from zero to the maximum speed. - If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate. - If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.

22.02 ACCEL TIME 1

0.099999.0 s 22.03 DECEL TIME 1

Acceleration time Defines the deceleration time 1, i.e. the time required for the speed to change from the maximum to zero. - If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. - If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. - If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on. Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a braking chopper and a braking resistor.

10 = 1 s

0.099999.0 s 22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 0.099999.0 s 22.05 DECEL TIME 2 0.099999.0 s 22.06 SHAPE TIME

Deceleration time. See 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Acceleration time. See 22.03 DECEL TIME 1. Deceleration time. 0.0 s: Linear Ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps. 0.01 to 1000.0 s: S-curve Ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear section in between. Speed Linear ramp: 22.06 = 0 s Max A rule of thumb: A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1/5.

10 = 1 s 10 = 1 s 10 = 1 s

S-curve ramp: 22.06 > 0 s

Time 22.02 0.001000.00 s Acceleration time. 22.06 100 = 1 s

Actual signals and parameters

91

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if - the drive receives an emergency stop command or - the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value OFF3 (see 21.07 HOLD AT ZERO TIME). The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for more information on the optional module and the related settings of the Standard Control Program.

FbEq

22.07 E-STOP RAMP TIME

0.01000.0 s 22.08 VARIABLE SLOPE

Deceleration Time. Variable slope is used to smooth the speed reference step changes from an overriding controller. If the overriding controller is generating the ramped speed reference to the drive (not using the internal drive ramp), the cycle time of the controller may cause the reference to be stepped instead of smooth. When the drive sees a speed step, it responds with a torque step that may upset the process. To compensate for the stepped reference, the drive can ramp the reference from the current to the new step, using the VAR SLOPE RATE as the time. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Variable slope is not active. Variable slope is active. Cycle time of the overriding controller. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. Ramp time for constant speeds. Note: This only applies when CNST SPD RUN SEL is set to STRT W/ CNST.

10 = 1 s

NO YES 22.09 VAR SLOPE RATE 10.01000.0 ms 22.10 CNSTSPD (JOG) RAMP

0 65535

10 = 1 ms

0.01000.0 s

Setting Range. Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. See section Speed controller tuning on page 36. Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time = 0 TD= Derivation time = 0 % Error Value Controller Output Controller output = Kp e e = Error value t

10 = 1 s

23 SPEED CONTROL
23.01 GAIN

0.0250.0

Gain.

100 = 1

Actual signals and parameters

92

No.

Name Value

Description Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. % Controller Output Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time = 0

FbEq

23.02 INTEGRATION TIME

Kp e

Kp e

e = Error value t 1000 = 1 s

TI
0.01999.97 s 23.03 DERIVATION TIME Integration time.

Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances. Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant. Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time > 0 Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms e = Error value change between two samples Controller Output Kp e Error Value Kp e e = Error value

% e Kp TD Ts

TI 0.09999.8 ms Derivation time value.

t 1 = 1 ms

Actual signals and parameters

93

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the derivation time for acceleration compensation. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described for 23.03 DERIVATION TIME. Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine. (The speed controller autotuning does this automatically, see 23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN.) The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp. No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation % % Speed reference Actual speed

FbEq

23.04 ACC COMPENSATION

t 0.00999.98 s 23.05 SLIP GAIN Derivation time.

t 10 = 1 s

Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation. Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.

0.0400.0% 23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN

Slip gain value. Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions: - Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed. - Change 23.06 to YES. Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.

1 = 1%

NO YES 23.07 INTEG INIT VALUE -300.00300.00% 23.08 DERIV FILT TIME 0.0100000.0 ms 23.09 ACC COMP FILT 0.0999999.0 ms 23.10 DAMPENING COEF

No autotuning. Initial value of the integrator. Setting range. Derivation time for the speed controller. Setting range. Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient. Setting range. Coefficient of dampening for AUTOTUNE RUN. A lower value yields an increased dynamic response. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range.

Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. 65535 100 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 1 = 1 ms

010

1=1

Actual signals and parameters

94

No.

Name Value

Description The proportional gain setting when the speed controller output is zero. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. The output level of the speed controller where the gain is set to GAIN. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. This can soften the rate of change for the proportional gain. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Filter time constant. Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled. The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice. The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load. Speed decrease = Speed controller output Drooping Max. speed Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is 1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm. Speed decrease = 0.50 0.01 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm No Drooping 100% Motor Speed % of nominal Drooping } DROOP RATE Speed Controller Output / % Drive load

FbEq

23.11 P-GAIN MIN 0100 23.12 P-GAIN WEAKPOINT 0Max Torque% 23.13 P-GAIN WP FILT 099999 ms 23.14 DROOP RATE

1=1

1 = 1%

1 = 1 ms

100% 0.0100.0% 23.15 KPS TIS MIN FREQ Setting range. The minimum frequency limit above which the relative gain and integral time is defined by 23.17 KPS VAL MIN FREQ and 23.18 TIS VAL MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. 0200 Hz 23.16 KPS TIS MAX FREQ 0200 Hz 23.17 KPS VAL MIN FREQ Setting range. The frequency point which relative KPS and TIS equal 100% Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. The relative gain percentage of the KPS value at the speed defined by 23.15 KPS TIS MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. 1 = 1 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 10 = 1%

Actual signals and parameters

95

No.

Name Value 100500%

Description Setting range. The relative gain percentage of the TIS value at the speed defined by 23.15 KPS TIS MIN FREQ. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. The time constant of the first order actual speed filter. Note: Visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE. Setting range. Torque control variables. The parameters are not visible if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. Load compensation added to 02.10 TORQ REF 3. Note: If the overriding system sends a value here, it must be set to zero before the stop command is given to the drive.

FbEq 1 = 1%

23.18 TIS VAL MIN FREQ

100500% 23.19 SPEED FDBK FILT 010000 ms

1 = 1%

1 = 1 ms

24 TORQ REF CTRL

24.08 LOAD COMPENSATION

-300.00300.00% 24.09 TORQ TRIM

Setting range. Additional torque step added to 02.11 TORQ REF 4. Note: If the overriding system sends a value here, it must be set to zero before the stop command is given to the drive.

100 = 1%

-300.00300.00% 24.10 SPD TORQ MAX 0.0300.0% 24.11 SPD TORQ MIN -300.00.0%

Setting range. Maximum torque limit of the speed regulator output. Setting range. Minimum torque limit of the speed regulator output. Setting range. Speed control variables. Note: These values are READ-ONLY. Initial speed reference from keypad or remote source. Speed Reference Share Coefficient. This value is multiplied by 25.01 SPEED REF. Setting range. Speed step added to the ramped speed reference. Used for tension trim. Speed step added to 25.01 SPEED REF. Used with 12.06 TAKE-UP/ PAYOUT. Initial frequency reference from Keypad or Remote Source. Flux control variables. Improves the stability of a system by decreasing the amount of electrical motor flux when low torque requirements are present. Activates/deactivates the flux optimization function. See section Flux Optimization on page 35. Note: The function cannot be used if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR.

100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1%

25 SPEED REF
25.01 SPEED REF 25.02 SPEED MULTIPLIER 0.00400.00% 25.03 SPEED CORRECTION

1 = 1 rpm

100 = 1% 20000 = 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 20000 = 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX 100 = 1 Hz

25.04 ADDITIVE SPD REF

25.05 FREQUENCY REF

26 FLUX CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION

NO YES

Inactive. Active.

0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

96

No.

Name Value

Description Activates/deactivates the flux braking function. See section Flux Braking on page 34. Note: The function cannot be used if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR.

FbEq

26.02 FLUX BRAKING

NO YES 26.03 IR-COMPENSATION

Inactive. Active. Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with high breakaway torque, but no DTC motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR compensation. Note: The function can be used only if 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR. U /UN (%) 100% Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.

0 65535

15%

Relative output voltage. No IR compensation. Field weakening point f (Hz) 100 = 1%

030% 26.06 FLUX REF/MAX 30.0100.0% 26.07 ACTIVE FLUX CTRL NO YES 26.08 FLUX REF 2 30.0100.0% 26.09 FLUX MIN 0.0100.0% 26.10 FLUX RAMP RATE 0.0100.0 s

Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage Maximum flux reference. Used if 26.07 ACTIVE FLUX CTRL is NO or if the required motor torque is > 30%. Setting range. Activates/deactivates the active flux control. Motor flux percentage equals 26.06 FLUX REF/MAX. Motor flux percentage comes from the active program control. Motor flux percentage active while no run signal is present or when the required motor torque is >10% and <30%. Setting range. Motor flux percentage active while required motor torque is <10%. Setting range. The time it takes for the flux to ramp from 26.09 FLUX MIN to 26.06 FLUX REF/MAX when 26.07 ACTIVE FLUX CTRL is set to YES. Setting range. Control of the brake chopper. Activates the brake chopper control. Note: If an external chopper (e.g. NBRA-xxx) is used, parameter must be disabled.

10 = 1% 0 66535

10 = 1% 10 = 1%

10 = 1 s

27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL

OFF

Inactive.

Actual signals and parameters

97

No.

Name Value ON

Description Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the overvoltage control is switched off (20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL). Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The useradjustable variables are 27.03 BR RESISTANCE, 27.04 BR THERM TCONST and 27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER. Inactive. Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used in the overload protection. See 27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC. Resistance value. Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the overload protection. See 27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC. Time Constant. Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload protection. See 27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC. Power. Selects the control mode of the braking chopper. Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit, the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive. The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC voltage rises due to abnormally high supply voltage level. Long time supply voltage rise would damage the chopper.

FbEq 65536

27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC

NO WARNING FAULT 27.03 BR RESISTANCE 0.01100.00 Ohm 27.04 BR THERM TCONST 0.00110000.000 s 27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER

0 1 2

1 = 1 Ohm

1=1s

0.0110000.00 kW 0.0113405 Hp 27.06 BC CTRL MODE AS GENERATOR

1 = 1 kW 1 = 1 Hp 0

COMMON DC

Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit. The selection is to be used in applications where several inverters are connected to the same intermediate circuit (DC bus). WARNING! Excessive supply voltage will raise the intermediate circuit voltage above the operation limit of the chopper. If the voltage remains abnormally high for a long period, the braking chopper will be overloaded and damaged.

65535

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT

Programmable protection functions. Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by the function defined by 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE. See section Motor Thermal Protection on page 39. Note: The parameter has no effect if the motor temperature measurement has been activated by parameter group 35 MTR TEMP MEAS.

FAULT

The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the 1 warning level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value). The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning level (95% of the nominal value). Inactive. 2 3

WARNING NO

Actual signals and parameters

98

No.

Name Value

Description Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is detected, the drive reacts as defined by 30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT. The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following assumptions are used in the calculation: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature 86 F (30 C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve. - The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self-ventilated squirrel-cage motor. It is possible to fine-tune the model by 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE. Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT is higher than 800 A). WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.

FbEq

30.05 MOT THERM P MODE

DTC

USER MODE

The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and 2 the following basic assumptions: - The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature 86 F (30 C). - The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve. The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant (30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME) and the motor load curve (using 30.06, 30.07, 30.08 and 30.09). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor. WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.

Actual signals and parameters

99

No.

Name Value THERMISTOR

Description

FbEq

Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor 3 thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows: DI6 Status (Thermistor Resistance) 1 (01.5 kOhm) 0 (4 kOhm or higher) Temperature Normal Overtemperature

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input. WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change these settings before selecting THERMISTOR. In other words, ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter. The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. Alternative 1 Thermistor relay

RMIO I/O Board 6 7 T Motor 18 19 DI6 +24 VDC

Alternative 2

RMIO I/O Board 6 7 18 19 DI6 +24 VDC

T Motor KLIXON

10 nF

Temperature switch in the motor windings. Uses digital input DI6.

Actual signals and parameters

100

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER MODE of 30.05 MOTOR THERM P MODE). Motor Load 100%

FbEq

30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME

Temperature 100% 63%

Motor thermal time constant 256.09999.8 s 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE Time constant.

t 1=1s

Defines the load curve together with 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 30.09 BREAK POINT. The load curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER MODE of 30.05 MOTOR THERM P MODE). I = Motor current I/IN (%) 30.07 100 50 30.08 30.09 Drive output frequency 1 = 1% IN = Nominal motor current

50.0150.0% 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25.0150.0% 30.09 BREAK POINT 1.0300.0 Hz 30.10 STALL FUNCTION

Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. Defines the load curve together with 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE and 30.09 BREAK POINT.

Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal 1 = 1% motor current Defines the load curve together with 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE and 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD. Drive output frequency at 100% load. Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up if: - the drive is at stall limit (defined by parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14) - the output frequency is below the level set by 30.11 STALL FREQ HI and - the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by 30.12 STALL TIME. See section Stall Protection on page 40. 100 = 1 Hz

Actual signals and parameters

101

No.

Name Value NO WARNING FAULT

Description Protection is invalid.

FbEq 1

The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the 2 time set by 30.12 STALL TIME. The drive trips on a fault. Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See 30.10 STALL FUNCTION. Stall frequency. Defines the time for the stall function. See 30.10 STALL FUNCTION. Stall time Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if: - the motor torque falls below the curve selected by 30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE, - output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and - the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by 30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME. See section Underload Protection on page 40. 1=1s 100 = 1 Hz 3

30.11 STALL FREQ HI 0.550.0 Hz 30.12 STALL TIME 10.00400.00 s 30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC

NO WARNING FAULT 30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 0600 s 30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE

Protection is inactive. The drive generates a warning. The drive trips upon a fault. Time limit for the underload function. See 30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION. Underload time. Selects the load curve for the underload function. See 30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC. TM/TN TM = Motor torque (%) TN= Nominal motor torque 100 = Nominal motor frequency
N

1 2 3

1=1s

80 60 40 20 0 N 15 30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO FAULT Number of the load curve. 1 2

3 70%

50% 5 30% 4

2.4 * N 1=1

Activates the motor phase loss supervision function. See section Motor Phase Loss on page 40. Inactive. Active. The drive trips on a fault. 0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

102

No.

Name Value

Description Selects how the drive reacts when an ground fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable. See section Ground Fault Protection on page 40. The drive generates a warning. The drive trips on a fault. Action the drive will take when a COMM MOD LOSS is detected. Fieldbus communication loss is not checked. The drive will ramp to a stop and show a warning. The drive will fault, remove the run command and coast to a stop. The delay time before a COMM MOD LOSS is declared. Setting range. Supervision limits. Activates/deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. Supervision is not used. Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle. speed/rpm ABS LOW LIMIT 0 -ABS LOW LIMIT

FbEq

30.17 GROUND FAULT

WARNING FAULT 30.18 COMM FLT FUNC NO ERR CHK RAMP STOP COAST STOP 30.19 COMM TIMEOUT 060000 ms

0 65535 1 2 3 1 = 1 ms

32 SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT ABS LOW LIM

1 2 3 4

32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT -1800018000 rpm 32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION 32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 32.07 TORQUE1 FUNCTION NO LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT 32.08 TORQUE1 LIMIT -600.0600.0% 32.09 TORQUE2 FUNCTION 32.10 TORQUE2 LIMIT

Defines the speed supervision limit. See 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION. Value of the limit See parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION. See parameter 32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT. Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the type of the supervision limit. See 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION. See 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION. See 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION. Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see 32.07 TORQUE1 FUNCTION). Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque See 32.07 TORQUE1 FUNCTION. See 32.08 TORQUE1 LIMIT. Program version, serial number. Note: These values are READ-ONLY. Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive. 10 = 1% 13 10 = 1% 1 2 3 1 = 1 rpm 14 1 = 1 rpm

33 INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION

Actual signals and parameters

103

No.

Name Value

Description Decoding key:

FbEq -

BHxxxxyx
Product Family B = ACS800 Product H = ACS800 Inline Application Firmware Version xxyx = Version 3.xyx 33.02 APPL SW VERSION 33.03 APPL RELEASE DATE 33.04 BOARD TYPE Displays the type and the version of the control program. Displays the date the firmware was released. Shows the control board type. Note: RMIO-Ix boards have different type of FLASH memory chips than RMIO-0x. Only software version BHXR3500 or later will operate with RMIO-1x boards. -

35 MTR TEMP MEAS

Motor temperature measurement. See sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 45 and Motor temperature measurement through the analog I/O extension on page 47. Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the sensor type. The function is inactive. 1 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt100 2 sensor. Analog output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade. The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt100 sensors. See selection 1xPT100. 3 4

35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL NOT IN USE 1xPT100

2xPT100 3xPT100 1..3 PTC

5 The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC sensors. Analog output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it into Ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature. Ohm 4000 Temperature Resistance Normal Excessive 01.5 kOhm > 4 kOhm 550 100 1330

Actual signals and parameters

104

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or Ohms. C: 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL is 1..3 PTC. Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded. Limit in C or Ohms. C: 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. Ohm: 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL is 1..3 PTC. See 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL. See 35.02 MTR1 TEMP ALM LVL. See 35.03 MTR1 TEMP FLT LVL. Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model compensation. The function is inactive. The temperature is used in the motor model compensation. Note: Selection is possible only when Pt100 sensor(s) are used. Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is installed and activated by 98.01 ENCODER MODULE. The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed.

FbEq

35.02 MTR1 TEMP ALM LVL -105000 Ohm/oC (PTC/Pt100) 35.03 MTR1 TEMP FLT LVL -105000 Ohm/oC (PTC/Pt100) 35.04 MTR2 TEMP SEL 35.05 MTR2 TEMP ALM LVL 35.06 MTR2 TEMP FLT LVL 35.07 MTR MODEL COMP NO YES

1 = 1 oC

1 = 1 oC

14 1 = 1 oC 1 = 1 oC

0 65535

50 PULSE ENCODER

50.01 PULSE NR 029999 ppr 50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A_- B DIR A_-_ A_-_ B DIR A_-_ B_-_ 50.03 ENCODER FAULT

States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution. Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr). Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated. Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 1 Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel 2 B: not used. Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. All edges of the signals are calculated.(Recommended Setting) Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication between the pulse encoder and the Pulse Encoder Interface Module or in between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if either of the following conditions is valid: - here is a 20% difference between the estimated speed and the measured speed received from the encoder. - No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see 50.04 ENCODER DELAY) and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value. 3 4 1 = 1 ppr

WARNING FAULT 50.04 ENCODER DELAY 550000 ms

The drive generates a warning indication. The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See 50.03 ENCODER FAULT). Time delay.

0 65535

1=1

Actual signals and parameters

105

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the fiber optic channel of the control board from which the drive program reads the signals coming from the Pulse Encoder Interface Module. Signals via Channel 1 (CH1). The Pulse Encoder Module must be connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a Master Station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). Signals via Channel 2 (CH2). Can be used in most cases. Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated. Calculated speed estimate. Actual speed measured with an encoder. Medium filter time for the speed measurement in the NTAC module. Setting range. Selects the drive operation when encoder signal is missing. Note: Monitoring is only for RTAC-03. For more information, see RTAC-03 Pulse Encoder Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68650500 (English)].

FbEq

50.05 ENCODER CHANNEL

CH 1

CH 2 50.06 SPEED FDBK SEL INTERNAL ENCODER 50.07 NTAC FILTER TIME 020 ms 50.08 ENC CABLE CHECK

2 0 65535 1=1

NO WARNING FAULT

No action. Drive generates warning ENC CABLE. Drive trips on fault ENC CABLE. The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by 98.02 FIELDBUS MODULE. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module. These parameter settings will remain the same even if the macro is changed.

0 1 2

51 FIELDBUS DATA

52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1247 52.02 BAUDRATE 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 52.03 PARITY NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT ODD EVEN

The setting for the standard modbus link.This group will be Visible only when Standard Modbus is selected by 98.02 FIELDBUS MODULE. Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line. Address. Defines the transfer rate of the link. 600 bit/s. 1200 bit/s. 2400 bit/s. 4800 bit/s. 9600 bit/s. 19200 bits/s. Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all on-line stations. No parity bit, one stop bit. No parity bit, two stop bits. Odd parity indication bit, one stopbit. Even parity indication bit, one stopbit. Non-macro specific inline parameters. Allows inertia compensation to be used and makes Group 64 visible. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6

60 APPLIC CONTROLS
60.01 INERTIA COMP ENBL

Actual signals and parameters

106

No.

Name Value NO YES

Description Inertia compensation is not needed. Inertia compensation is needed. Ratio between motor rpm and spindle rpm. Setting range. The percent (of maximum tension) deviation allowed before error detection. Setting range. Time after detection occurs before a digital output (PACK STATUS BITS bit 00) is set. See chapter Fieldbus control. Setting range. Used to control web tension by manually trimming the speed. Selects the signal source for the reference value for the draw amount. Draw is not used. Analog input 1 (voltage). Analog input 2 (current). Analog input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage or current). Analog input 6 (voltage or current). 06.06 DATASET 3 WORD 3. See chapter Fieldbus control. Digital inputs DI3 and DI4 are used as a digital pot. 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bits 04 and 05 are used as a digital pot. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by DRAW REF PTR. Selects if draw trim is enabled when dancer or tension control is active. Function is disabled when dancer or tension control is active. Function is enabled when dancer or tension control is active. Maximum trim allowed. Example: If 10% is entered, a minimum input (0 VDC / 0 mA) yields a 10% trim value. A maximum input (10 VDC / 20 mA) yields a +10% trim value. Setting range. Sets the rate of change for the digital pot selections. Setting range. Communicated progressive draw selection. Only the draw reference is sent to downstream drives.

FbEq 0 65535 100 = 1

60.02 GEAR RATIO 0.101000.00 (:1) 60.03 WEB LOSS TRIP 0.0100.0% 60.04 WEB LOSS DELAY 0.0100.0 s

10 = 1%

10 = 1 s

61 DRAW TRIM
61.01 DRAW REF SEL NOT SEL AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 FIELDBUS DI3, DI4 FBUS b4,5 PARAM 61.06 61.02 DRAW W/TRIM OFF DAN/TEN ON DAN/TEN 61.03 DRAW RANGE +/-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0 65535

0500% 61.04 DIGITL POT RATEms 10032767 ms 61.05 PROG COMM DRAW % DRAW ONLY ADD DAN/TEN 61.06 DRAW REF PTR

1 = 1% 1 = 1 ms 0

The draw reference plus the dancer/tension trim is sent to downstream 65535 drives. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 61.06 of 61.01 DRAW REF SEL; C10000 gives 0% draw. -

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.05 EXT 1 / C.-32768C.32767 STRT PTR for information on the difference.

Actual signals and parameters

107

No.

Name Value

Description Dancer control and PI regulator setup. Note: This group is hidden unless a Dancer macro is selected. Sets the immediate reaction step of the PI regulator. The default values give a good starting point for the gain and they should not be modified until the machine is running. Note that too large of a gain could lead to instability.

FbEq

62 DANCER CONTROLS
62.01 P-GAIN 1

0.011000.00 K 62.03 INTEG TIME 1

Setting range. Integration time of the dancer PI regulator. The default value gives a good starting point for the integration time of the PI regulator. A lower integration time results in a more responsive system; however, too low of an integration time can lead to instability. Setting range. Selects the activation signal source for forcing the integration time of the dancer PI regulator to zero. The PI controller will become just a P controller. Function not selected. Digital input DI2 = 1 forces the integration time to zero. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

100 = 1 K

1010000 ms 62.04 ZERO INTEG TIME

1 = 1 ms

NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS 62.05 RANGE ADJUST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 13 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 03. See chapter Fieldbus control. Determines the amount of speed correction the PI regulator is allowed to add. The value entered is scaled to 62.06 TRIM REG REL TO. Example: If 62.05 RANGE ADJUST = 5% 62.06 TRIM REG REL TO = SPD REF MAX 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX = 1800 rpm 02.25 DANCER REG OUTPUT = 100% then 25.03 SPEED CORRECTION = 0.05*1800*1 = 90 rpm

0.0100.0% 62.06 TRIM REG REL TO

Setting range. Setting this to SPD REF MAX multiplies the output of the PI regulator by 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX. Setting it to SPD REF ACT multiplies the output of the PI regulator by the actual speed reference to the drive. Selecting SPD REF MAX means that the maximum speed correction is constant, regardless of the drive speed, whereas selecting SPD REF ACT gives a varying maximum that is speed dependant. Value set by 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. Value set by 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT with a minimum reference for scaling of 62.07 MIN REF TO REG.

10 = 1%

SPD REF MAX SPD REF ACT

0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

108

No.

Name Value

Description If 62.06 TRIM REG REL TO is set to SPD REF ACT it may be desired to have a minimum value that the PI regulator is multiplied by; this minimum value is set here. If the actual speed reference goes below this parameter, the PI regulator output will no longer be multiplied by the reference, it will instead be multiplied by this parameter. Setting range. If the PI regulator is adjusting the speed in the wrong direction it can be reversed here. Regulator output is not reversed. Regulator output is reversed. Digital input DI2 = 1 reverses the regulator output. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

FbEq

62.07 MIN REF TO REG

0.010000.0 rpm 62.08 REV REG OUT NO YES DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS 62.09 DANCER CTL ENABLE

10 = 1 rpm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 15. See chapter Fieldbus control. Set to ENABLE if this is a single position machine and there are no requirements to ever RUN without dancer control. Set to a DI or FBA option if this is a turret or if there are some instances where the dancer regulation should be ignored in RUN mode.

NOT SEL YES DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS

Not enabled. The drive is in pure speed mode. Digital input DI2 = 1 enables the regulation trim. Otherwise it is in pure speed mode. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Enabled. When the drive is in run, the dancer regulation trim is active. 2

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 00. See chapter Fieldbus control.

Actual signals and parameters

109

No.

Name Value PARAM 62.32

Description Source selected by 62.32 DAN CTRL ENBL PTR. This parameter is only used if the drive is used to control the dancer loading. If the drive is not controlling the dancer loading (02.24 DANCER LOAD REF is not sent to an AO) then this parameter can be ignored. The DANCER LOAD REF is generated from 02.23 DANCER LOAD SETPT, taper setpoint, and stall tension setpoint. This value can be sent to an AO to drive a pressure transducer to load the dancer.

FbEq 15

62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 FIELDBUS PARAM 62.33 62.11 DANCER FDBK INPUT

Analog input 1 (voltage). Analog input 2 (current). Analog input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage or current). Analog input 6 (voltage or current). 06.04 DATASET 3 WORD 1. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 62.33 DAN LD SETPT PTR. Set to the AI that the dancer feedback device is wired into. The feedback device should be set up to provide zero output (approx. 0.10.5 VDC) at full storage and full output (approx. 9.510 VDC) at no storage. If the feedback device provides a bipolar signal, connect it up to AI6; the feedback should range from approx. -109.5 VDC. Note: If the maximum feedback voltage cannot be attained the position measuring device should be adjusted to the best resolution. Loss of resolution may decrease the performance of the overall tension regulation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 (0V) AI6 (0V) AI6 (-10V) PARAM 62.34 62.14 MAX DANCER TRAVEL

Analog input 1 (voltage). Analog input 2 (current). Analog input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage). Analog input 6 (voltage). Analog input 6 (bipolar voltage). Source selected by 62.34 DAN FDBK PTR. Set to the total mechanical travel of the dancer; the dancer automatically regulates to the midpoint of this distance. Should it be desired to have the dancer regulate to something other than midpoint, enter this offset value into 62.15 CENTER OFFSET. Setting range. Desired offset distance from dancer null value (to which dancer regulates). Setting range. Sets or selects the activation signal source for switching the gain and integration time for the dancer PI regulator. Not selected. 62.01 P-GAIN 1 and 62.03 INTEG TIME 1 are used. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1.02500.0 mm 1.02500.0 inch 62.15 CENTER OFFSET -1250.01250.0 mm -1250.01250.0 inch 62.23 WEB 2 SELECT NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4

10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch

10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch

1 3 4

Digital input DI2 = 1 selects 62.24 P-GAIN 2 and 62.26 INTEG TIME 2. 2

Actual signals and parameters

110

No.

Name Value DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS

Description See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

FbEq 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 13 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 01. See chapter Fieldbus control. Optional proportional gain of the dancer PI regulator. Setting range. Optional integration time of the dancer PI regulator. Setting range. This parameter is only used if the drive is used to control the dancer loading. If the drive is not controlling the dancer loading (03.04 DANCER LOAD REF is not sent to an AO) then this parameter can be ignored. If NORMAL GAIN is selected, stall mode is active when the line speed is less than 62.29 STALL SPEED. When stall mode is active, 03.04 DANCER LOAD REF is reduced to a percentage of 03.03 DANCER LOAD SETPT as defined by 62.28 STALL SETPNT. In this mode, the PI regulator uses the normal gain and integration time. If STALL GAIN is selected, the reaction is the same as NORMAL GAIN except that the PI regulator uses 62.30 STALL P-GAIN and 62.31 STALL INTEG. 1 = 1 ms 100 = 1 K

62.24 P-GAIN 2 0.011000.00 K 62.26 INTEG TIME 2 1010000 ms 62.27 STALL ENABLE

DISABLE NORMAL GAIN STALL GAIN 62.28 STALL SETPOINT 1100% 62.29 STALL SPEED 0.022.0% 62.30 STALL P-GAIN 0.011000.00 K 62.31 STALL INTEG 1010000 ms 62.32 DAN CTRL ENBL PTR

Stall function is not selected. Stall function is selected and PI regulator gain at stall equals P-GAIN. Stall function is selected and PI regulator gain at stall equals 62.30 STALL P-GAIN. Setting range. Percentage of 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. Goes into stall mode below this speed. Setting range. Proportional gain of the dancer PI regulator when in stall mode. Setting range. Integration time of the dancer PI regulator when in stall mode. Setting range. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 62.32 of 62.09 DANCER CTL ENABLE.

1 2 3

1 = 1%

10 = 1% 100 = 1 k 1 = 1 ms

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 62.33 DAN LD SETPT PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 62.33 of 62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT.

Actual signals and parameters

111

No.

Name Value

Description

FbEq -

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 62.34 DAN FDBK PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 62.34 of 62.11 DANCER FDBK INPUT

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

63 TENSION CONTROLS
63.01 P-GAIN 1

Tension control and PI regulator setup. Note: This group is hidden unless a Tension macro is selected. This parameter sets the immediate reaction step of the PI regulator. The default values give a good starting point for the gain and they should not be modified until the machine is running. Note that too large of a gain could lead to instability.

0.011000.00 K 63.03 INTEG TIME 1

Setting range. The default value gives a good starting point for the integration time of the PI regulator. A lower integration time results in a more responsive system; however, too low of an integration time can lead to instability. Setting range. Selects the activation signal source for forcing the integration time of the tension PI regulator to zero. The PI controller will become just a P controller. Function not selected. Digital input DI2 = 1 forces the integration time to zero. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

100 = 1 K

1010000 ms 63.04 ZERO INTEG TIME

1 = 1 ms

NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS 63.05 RANGE ADJUST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 13 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 03. See chapter Fieldbus control. Determines the amount of speed correction the PI regulator is allowed to add. The value entered is scaled to 63.06 TRIM REG REL TO. Example: If 63.05 RANGE ADJUST = 5% 63.06 TRIM REG REL TO = SPD REF MAX 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX = 1800 rpm 03.09 TENSION REG OUTPUT = 100% then 25.03 SPEED CORRECTION = 0.05*1800*1 = 90 rpm

0.0100.0%

Setting range.

10 = 1%

Actual signals and parameters

112

No.

Name Value

Description Setting this to SPD REF MAX multiplies the output of the PI regulator by 11.05 EXT1 REF MAX. Setting it to SPD REF ACT multiplies the output of the PI regulator by the actual speed reference to the drive. Selecting SPD REF MAX means that the maximum speed correction is constant, regardless of the drive speed, whereas selecting SPD REF ACT gives a varying maximum that is speed dependant. Value set by 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. Value set by 11.04 EXT1 REF SELECT with a minimum reference for scaling of 63.07 MIN REF TO REG. If 63.06 TRIM REG REL TO is set to SPD REF ACT it may be desired to have a minimum value that the PI regulator is multiplied by; this minimum value is set here. If the actual speed reference goes below this parameter, the PI regulator output will no longer be multiplied by the reference, it will instead be multiplied by this parameter. Setting range. If the PI regulator is adjusting the speed in the wrong direction it can be reversed here. Regulator output is not reversed. Regulator output is reversed. Digital input DI2 = 1 reverses the regulator output. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

FbEq

63.06 TRIM REG REL TO

SPD REF MAX SPD REF ACT 63.07 MIN REF TO REG

0 65535

01000 rpm 63.08 REV REG OUT NO YES DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABL

10 = 1 rpm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 15. See chapter Fieldbus control. Set to ENABLE if this is a single position machine and there are no requirements to ever RUN without tension control. Set to a DI or FBA option if this is a turret or if there are some instances where the tension regulation should be ignored in RUN mode.

NOT SEL YES DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6

Not enabled. The drive is in pure speed mode. Digital input DI2 = 1 enables the regulation trim. Otherwise it is in pure speed mode. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

1 3 4 5 6 7

Enabled. When the drive is in run, the tension regulation trim is active. 2

Actual signals and parameters

113

No.

Name Value DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS PARAM 63.32

Description See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

FbEq 8 9 10 11 12 13

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 14 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 00. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 63.32 TEN CTRL ENBL PTR. Selects the signal source for setting the tension setpoint. Analog input 1 (voltage). Analog input 2 (current). Analog input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage or current). Analog input 6 (voltage or current). 06.04 DATASET 3 WORD 1. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 63.33 TEN SETPT PTR. Set to the AI that the tension feedback device is wired into. The feedback device should be set up to provide zero output (approx. 00.3 VDC) at zero tension and full output (approx. 9.710 VDC) at maximum tension. HINT: To apply maximum tension, feed a rope or strap through the machine and apply enough weight at the end of the rope to give the maximum tension. Once this is done, adjust the device's output for 10 VDC. If the maximum output is less than the above recommended values, it is recommended to review the device's range of operation for correct sizing. Second, check for correct installation and orientation of the device. Finally, if the application is correct, use an analog amplifier to increase the signal to the above recommended values. Note: Usage of a reduced feedback signal will result in loss of resolution. A loss of resolution may decrease the performance of the overall tension regulation. Use of the scaling parameter for the analog input does not improve signal resolution. Note: Use of properly rated tension transducers (loadcells) for the application is required. The transducers should be sized as close to the application's required maximum tension as possible. For example, using transducers rated for 400 lbs tension is not acceptable for applications in which web tension ranges from 5 to 40 lbs. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15

63.10 TENSION SETPOINT AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 FIELDBUS PARAM 63.33 63.11 TENSION FDBK INPUT

AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 PARAM 63.34 63.14 MAXIMUM TENSION

Analog input 1 (voltage). Analog input 2 (current). Analog input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage or current). Analog input 6 (voltage or current). Source selected by 63.34 TEN FDBK PTR. This parameter scales the value that comes in on the selected input given by 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT. This scaled value is 03.07 TENSION SETPOINT.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Actual signals and parameters

114

No.

Name Value 199999 N 199999 lb

Description Setting range. Selecting CLOSE LP SPD mode means the drive operates as a speed controller with the output of the tension PI regulator adjusting the speed. Depending on the status of 63.16 MODE TRANSITION, the drive can also be switched to a torque controlled drive with no trim function. Selecting OPEN LP TQ mode means the drive operates as a torque controller with no trim function. The torque reference is calculated from 03.08 TENSION REF, 64.03 SHAFT OUTER DIA, 60.02 GEAR RATIO, and 63.17 STATIC FRICTION. Note: Open loop torque control is NOT the recommended method for controlling web tension. The torque applied to the section is calculated from input parameters. Torque requirements to maintain constant tension vary based on mechanical and application characteristics. Since actual tension feedback is not used in this mode, the drive will not respond to unknown load changes. Therefore, precision may be lost during the process. Selecting CLOSE LP TQ mode means the drive operates as a torque controller with the output of the tension PI regulator adjusting the torque reference. The torque reference is calculated from 03.08 TENSION REF, 64.03 SHAFT OUTER DIA, 60.02 GEAR RATIO, and 63.17 STATIC FRICTION. Depending on the status of 63.16 MODE TRANSITION, the drive can also be switched to a torque controlled drive with no trim function.CLOSE LP TQ mode is recommended for precise web tension regulation. Note: Regardless of which mode is selected, when 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE is disabled, the drive is a speed controller.

FbEq 1=1N 1 = 1 lb

63.15 TENSION MODE

CLOSE LP SPD OPEN LP TQ CLOSE LP TQ 63.16 MODE TRANSITION

Speed control with trim from tension transducer (if tension is enabled). 1 Torque control with no tension transducer trim. Torque control with trim from tension transducer (if tension is enabled). When the selected input is 1, the mode selected in 63.15 TENSION MODE switches to open loop torque. When the selected input is 0, the mode reverts back to its original selection. Note: Tension control must be enabled when using this mode; if it is not, the drive is a speed controller. 2 3

NOT SEL DI1 (NO TRM) DI2 (NO TRM) DI3 (NO TRM) DI4 (NO TRM) DI5 (NO TRM) DI6 (NO TRM) DI7 (NO TRM) DI8 (NO TRM) DI9 (NO TRM) DI10 (NO TRM)

Mode transition is not selected.

Digital input DI1 = 1 switches the control to open loop torque (if tension 2 is enabled). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Actual signals and parameters

115

No.

Name Value DI11 (NO TRM) DI12 (NO TRM) FBA (NO TRM)

Description See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). See selection DI1 (NO TRM). Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 02. See chapter Fieldbus control. This is the mechanical friction of the section. This parameter must be adjusted if torque control is to be used at any time. For proper adjustment of this parameter, use one of the following two procedures. Procedure 1 1. Set 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE to NOT SEL. 2. Change to LOC mode on the keypad. 3. Set the keypad REF to 10% of 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM. 4. Start the drive via the keypad. 5. Multiply 01.05 TORQUE by 99.11 CALC MOTOR TORQUE. 6. Enter the above result in 63.17 STATIC FRICTION. Procedure 2 1. Set 63.15 TENSION MODE to OPEN LP TQ. 2. Enable tension control. 3. Set the tension setpoint to 0. 4. Start the drive. 5. At zero speed, rotate the core slightly by hand. Slightly increase 63.17 STATIC FRICTION. As you continue to increase the parameter, the core will slowly decrease in speed and, when it nearly comes to a stop, the correct value has been entered. Note: The friction offset should be entered as a negative value in Unwind sections. Since the web is pulled from the section, the friction actually increases the amount of tension on the web. Therefore, less tension torque is required.

FbEq 12 13 14

63.17 STATIC FRICTION

-1000.01000.0 Nm -1000.01000.0 lbft 63.23 WEB 2 SELECT NOT SEL DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 FIELDBUS

Setting range. Sets or selects the activation signal source for switching the gain and integration time for the tension PI regulator. Not selected. 62.01 P-GAIN 1 and 62.03 INTEG TIME 1 are used. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2. See selection DI2.

10 = 1 Nm 10 = 1 lbft

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Digital input DI2 = 1 selects 62.24 P-GAIN 2 and 62.26 INTEG TIME 2. 2

See selection DI2. Instead of a digital input, the command comes from 13 06.03 DATASET 1 WORD 3 bit 01. See chapter Fieldbus control.

Actual signals and parameters

116

No.

Name Value 0.011000.00 K

Description Optional proportional gain of the tension PI regulator. Setting range. Optional integration time of the tension PI regulator. Setting range. If NORMAL GAIN is selected, stall mode is active when the line speed is less than 63.29 STALL SPEED. When stall mode is active, 03.08 TENSION REF is reduced to a percentage of 03.07 TENSION SETPOINT as defined by 63.28 STALL SETPNT. In this mode, the PI regulator uses the normal gain and integration time. If STALL GAIN is selected, the reaction is the same as NORMAL GAIN except that the PI regulator uses 63.30 STALL P-GAIN and 63.31 STALL INTEG.

FbEq 100 = 1 K 1 = 1 ms

63.24 P-GAIN 2 63.26 INTEG TIME 2 1010000 ms 63.27 STALL ENABLE

DISABLE NORMAL GAIN STALL GAIN 63.28 STALL SETPOINT 1100% 63.29 STALL SPEED 0.022.0% 63.30 STALL P-GAIN 0.011000.00 K 63.31 STALL INTEG 1010000 ms 63.32 TEN CTRL ENBL PTR

Stall function is not selected. Stall function is selected and PI regulator gain at stall equals 63.30 STALL P-GAIN. Setting range. Percentage of 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM. Goes into stall mode below this speed. Setting range. Proportional gain of the dancer PI regulator when in stall mode. Setting range. Integration time of the dancer PI regulator when in stall mode. Setting range Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 63.32 of 63.09 TENSION CTL ENABLE.

1 3

Stall function is selected and PI regulator gain at stall equals P- GAIN. 2

1 = 1%

10 = 1% 100 = 1 1 = 1 ms

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 63.33 TEN SETPT PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 63.33 of 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT.

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference. 63.34 TEN FDBK PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 63.34 of 63.11 TENSION FDBK INPUT.

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

64 INERTIA CONTROL

Inertia compensation control and setup. Note: This group is hidden unless 60.01 INERTIA COMP ENBL is YES

64.01 INERTIA ON IN SPD NO YES 64.02 SHAFT WEIGHT

Enables inertia compensation when in speed mode instead of only in torque. Disabled. Enabled. Weight of the shaft. 0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

117

No.

Name Value 1.099999.0 kg 1.099999.0 lb

Description Setting range. Outer diameter of the shaft the core is on. Setting range. Inner diameter of the shaft the core is on. Setting range. Inertia of the motor. May be obtained from the motor manufacturer or see the appendix Motor Rotor Inertia for typical values. Setting range.

FbEq 10 = 1 kg 10 = 1 lb 10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch 10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch

64.03 SHAFT OUTER DIA 1.099999.0 mm 1.099999.0 inch 64.04 SHAFT INNER DIA 0.099999.0 mm 0.099999.0 inch 64.09 MOTOR INERTIA 0.011000.00 kg/m2 0.011000.00 lb/ft2 64.10 GEARING INERTIA 0.011000.00 kg/m2 0.011000.00 lb/ft2 64.11 DECEL % SCALE 50.0150.0%

100 = 1 kg/m2 100 = 1 lb/ft2

Inertia of the gearing. May be obtained from the gearbox manufacturer. Setting range. 100 = 1 kg/m2 100 = 1 lb/ft2 Percentage of inertia compensation used when decelerating. Setting range. Loadshare reference selection. Note: This group is hidden unless LOADSHARE macro is selected. Selects the signal source for setting the loadshare reference. Loadshare is set by 65.03 LDSH ADJ PTR. Analog Input 1 (voltage). Analog Input 2 (voltage). Analog Input 3 (current). Analog input 5 (voltage or current). Analog Input 6 (voltage or current). 06.04 DATASET 3 WORD 1. See chapter Fieldbus control. Source selected by 65.03 LDSH ADJ PTR. Determines the maximum split between the M/F. Example with 65.01 = AI1: A setting of 10% will give a: 60-40 split with 0 VDC 50-50 split with 5 VDC 40-60 split with 10 VDC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 = 1%

65 LOADSHARE CONTROL
65.01 LDSH ADJ SEL NOT SEL AI1 AI2 AI3 AI5 AI6 FIELDBUS PARAM 65.03 65.02 LDSH RANGE +/-

030% 65.03 LDSH ADJ PTR

Setting range. Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 65.03 of 65.01 LDSH ADJ SEL; C10000 gives a 50-50 split.

1 =1%

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value. See 10.05 EXT1 STRT PTR for / C.-32768C.32767 information on the difference.

Actual signals and parameters

118

No.

Name Value

Description Settings for the fiber optic channels. Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller AC 70 or another drive. Address. The communication speed of channel 0. 8 megabits per second. 4 megabits per second. 2 megabits per second. 1 megabits per second. Defines the node address for channel 2. Setting range. Selects how the drive will use CH2 in a Master/Follower ring. CH2 is not used. The drive is the master of the ring. The drive is a follower and receives the data sent from the Master as defined in the Masters master signal 1, 2, and 3. See selection FOLLOWER. The speed reference of the drive is automatically set to follow the master, regardless of the setting in 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT. See selection SPD FOLLOWER. The torque reference of the drive is automatically set to follow the master. Signal pointer for high speed dataset communications to followers as command word. Setting range. Signal pointer for high speed dataset communications to followers as Reference 1 (speed reference). Setting range. Signal pointer for high speed dataset communications to followers as Reference 2 (torque reference). Setting range. The delay time before a M/F COMM LOSS is declared. Setting range. Action the drive will take when a M/F COMM LOSS is detected. M/F communication loss is not checked. The drive will ramp to a stop and show a warning. The drive will fault, remove the run command and coast to a stop. Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the DriveWindow program running. Address.

FbEq

70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR

0254 70.02 CH0 BAUD RATE 8 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 1 Mbit/s 70.05 CH2 NODE ADDR 1125 70.06 CH2 M/F MODE NOT IN USE MASTER FOLLOWER SPD FOLLOWER

1=1 0 1 2 3 1=1 1 2 3 4

SPDTQ FOLLOW 70.07 MASTER SIGNAL 1 020000 70.08 MASTER SIGNAL 2 020000 70.09 MASTER SIGNAL 3 020000 70.10 M/F COMM DELAY 08388607 ms 70.11 M/F COM LOSS CTRL NO ERR CHK RAMP STOP COAST STOP 70.12 CHANNEL 3 ADDR

1=1

1=1

1=1 1 = 1 ms 1 2 3

1254

1=1

Actual signals and parameters

119

No.

Name Value

Description Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]). Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program. Stop. The program cannot be edited. Run. The program cannot be edited. Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited. Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK. The program must be in editing mode (see 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command has been executed. Shifts the block in location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK and the following blocks one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by programming the Block Parameter Set as usual. Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block number four (parameters 84.2084.25) and five (parameters 84.2584.29). In order to do this: - Shift the program to the editing mode by 83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD. - Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK. - Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location forward by 83.02 EDIT COMMAND (selection PUSH). - Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as usual.

FbEq

83 ADAPT PROG CTRL

83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD STOP RUN EDIT 83.02 EDIT COMMAND

1 2 3

NO PUSH

1 2

DELETE PROTECT

Deletes the block in location defined by 83.03 EDIT BLOCK and shifts 3 the following blocks one step down. Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is RUN or STOP (83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - Set the passcode (83.05 PASSCODE). - Change 83.02 EDIT COMMAND to PROTECT. When activated: - All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden (read protected). - It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - 83.05 PASSCODE is set to 0. 4

UNPROTECT

Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows: - Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is RUN or STOP (83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD). - Set the passcode (83.05 PASSCODE). - Change 83.02 EDIT COMMAND to UNPROTECT. Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by changing the application macro setting (99.02 APPLICATION MACRO).

83.03 EDIT BLOCK

Defines the block location number for the command selected by 83.02 EDIT COMMAND.

Actual signals and parameters

120

No.

Name Value 015

Description Block location number. Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid for all blocks. 12 milliseconds. 100 milliseconds. 1000 milliseconds. Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See 83.02 EDIT COMMAND. Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/ inactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a safe place.

FbEq 1=1

83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 12 ms 100 ms 1000 ms 83.05 PASSCODE

1 2 3

1=1

84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM

- selections of the function blocks and their input connections. - diagnostics For more information, see Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]).

84.01 STATUS

Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Display 1 2 4 8 10 20 40 100 Meaning Stopped Running Faulted Editing Checking Pushing Popping Initializing

1=1

84.02 FAULTED PAR 84.05 BLOCK1 ABS ADD AND BWISE COMPARE COUNT DPOT EVENT FILTER MASK-SET MAX MIN MULDIV

Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program. Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE64527274 [English]).

11 10 2 26 16 21 23 20 13 24 17 18 12

Actual signals and parameters

121

No.

Name Value NO OR PI PI-BAL PI-NEG RAMP SR SW-CB SW-IL TOFF TON TRIGG WR-I WR-PB XOR

Description

FbEq 1 3 14 15 25 22 5 7 19 9 8 6 27 28 4

84.06 INPUT1

Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1. -

-255.255.31+255.255.31 Parameter index or a constant value: / C.-32768C.32767 - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs. - Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value C to enable the constant setting. Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows: - Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The control program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.) - If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value (-01.17.01.). 84.07 INPUT2 See 84.06 INPUT1. -255.255.31+255.255.31 See 84.06 INPUT1. / C.-32768C.32767 84.08 INPUT3 See 84.06 INPUT1. -255.255.31+255.255.31 See 84.06 INPUT1. / C.-32768C.32767 84.09 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15. Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]). Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. 84.79 OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.

85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 -8388608 to 8388607 85.02 CONSTANT2 -8388608 to 8388607 85.03 CONSTANT3

1=1 1=1

Actual signals and parameters

122

No.

Name Value -8388608 to 8388607

Description Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program. Integer value. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block). Message. Addresses of the parameters into which the received fieldbus data are written.See Table 2 on page 143 for more default information. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Note: A connection for the fieldbus main command word is hardcoded in the program. If a signal other than this is sent to this location, ensure that no parameters are set to FIELDBUS (that use 06.01 DATA 1 WORD 1).

FbEq 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 -

85.04 CONSTANT4 -8388608 to 8388607 85.05 CONSTANT5 -8388608 to 8388607 85.06 CONSTANT6 -8388608 to 8388607 85.07 CONSTANT7 -8388608 to 8388607 85.08 CONSTANT8 -8388608 to 8388607 85.09 CONSTANT9 -8388608 to 8388607 85.10 CONSTANT10 -8388608 to 8388607 85.11 STRING1 MESSAGE1 85.12 STRING2 MESSAGE2 85.13 STRING3 MESSAGE3 85.14 STRING4 MESSAGE4 85.15 STRING5 MESSAGE5

90 DATASET INPUT SEL

90.01 DATA 1 WORD 1

010000 90.02 DATA 1 WORD 2

Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Note: A connection for the external reference is hardcoded in the program. If a signal other than this is sent to this location, ensure that 11.03 EXT1 REF SELECT is not set to FIELDBUS.

1=1

010000 90.03 DATA 1 WORD 3

Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Note: A connection for the fieldbus aux command word is hardcoded in the program. If a signal other than this is sent to this location, ensure that no parameters are set to FIELDBUS (that use 06.03 DATA 1 WORD 3).

1=1

010000

Setting range.

1=1

Actual signals and parameters

123

No.

Name Value

Description Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Note: A connection for the web tension and loadshare setpoint is hardcoded in the program. If a signal other than this is sent to this location, ensure that neither 62.10 DANCER LOAD SETPT, 63.10 TENSION SETPOINT nor 65.01 LDSH ADJ SEL are set to FIELDBUS.

FbEq

90.04 DATA 3 WORD 1

010000 90.05 DATA 3 WORD 2 010000 90.06 DATA 3 WORD 3

Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Note: A connection for the draw is hardcoded in the program. If a signal other than this is sent to this location, ensure that DRAW SEL is not set to FIELDBUS.

1=1 1=1

010000 90.08 DATA 5 WORD 2 010000 90.09 DATA 5 WORD 3 010000

Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter to which the value of the fieldbus is written. Setting range. Table 2 on page 143 for more default information.

1=1 1=1 1=1

92 DATASET OUTPUT SEL Addresses of the parameters that are to be sent over the fieldbus. See
92.01 DATA 2 WORD 1 010000 92.02 DATA 2 WORD 2 010000 92.03 DATA 2 WORD 3 010000 92.04 DATA 4 WORD 1 010000 92.05 DATA 4 WORD 2 010000 92.06 DATA 4 WORD 3 010000 92.07 DATA 6 WORD 1 010000 92.08 DATA 6 WORD 2 010000 92.09 DATA 6 WORD 3 010000 Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Pointer for the parameter thats value is sent over the fieldbus. Setting range. Fan speed control, sine filter application etc. Selects the speed control of the optional inverter cooling fan. Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz when powered. Drive stopped: Fan is running at constant frequency of 10 Hz. Drive running: Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz. 0 1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1 1=1

95 HARDWARE SPECIFIC
95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE CONST 50 Hz RUN/STOP

Actual signals and parameters

124

No.

Name Value CONTROLLED

Description The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed curve. Activates the inverter DC switch (switch fuse) monitoring function. The monitoring must be active when the Switch Fuse Control Board (ASFC) is in use and connected to the inverter AINT board, i.e. in all frame R8i inverters equipped with the DC switch. The function must be inactive in units that do not use the ASFC board withe the DC switch, i.e. for frame R2iR7i inverters and all single drive units where no DC switch exists. The default setting (ON or OFF) for each unit is set accordingly at the factory default. ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked when the program detects that the DC switch is opened or inverter charging is ongoing (at power switch on). The control program generates alarm INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is stopped. The inverter trips to fault INV DISABLED if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is running.

FbEq 2

95.02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL

OFF ON 95.03 INT CONFIG USER 112 95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ NO YES

Inactive. Active. Number of parallel connected inverter modules. Activates the Reduced Run function. Number of parallel connected inverter modules. Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation for Ex-motor applications. Inactive. Active. Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz. Used with motors with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency.

0 1

0 65535

Actual signals and parameters

125

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the reference value for the line-side converter reactive power generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to the supply network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit 24.02 Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Example 1: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT, value 10000 of 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100% of 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in 04.06 CONV NOM POWER). Example 2: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr, value 1000 of 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: 100 (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%. Example 3: When 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI, value 3000 of 24.02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to 24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: S 30

FbEq

95.06 LCU Q POW REF

P P cos ( 30 ) = --- = -----------------------S 2 2 P +Q

P Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load. Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load. P = signal 01.09 POWER value Parameter 24.03 values are converted to degrees by the line-side converter control program: -300030000 -3030. Value -10000/ 10000 equals to -30/30, since the range is limited to -3000/3000. -1000010000 95.07 LCU DC REF [V] Reference value. Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line-side converter. This reference is written into line-side converter parameter 23.01 DC VOLT REF. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)]. Voltage. Selects the line-side converter address from which 09.06 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 is read. Line-side converter parameter index. Selects the line-side converter address from which 09.07 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 is read. Line-side converter parameter index. Defines the ambient temperature for the Enhanced drive temperature monitoring function. See Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8 on page 42. Note: If ambient temperature exceeds 40oC, the drive load capacity decreases. See derating instructions in the appropriate hardware manual. 2050oC Temperature. 10 = 1 oC 1=1 1=1 1=1V 1=1

01100 V 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 09999 95.09 LCU PAR 2 SEL 09999 95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT

Actual signals and parameters

126

No.

Name Value

Description Activation of the optional I/O extension modules and fieldbus adapter. For more information on option modules, see the module manuals. These parameter settings will remain the same even if the macro is changed.

FbEq

98 OPTION MODULES

98.01 ENCODER MODULE NTAC

Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]). 0

NO RTAC-SLOT1 RTAC-SLOT2 RTAC-DDCS

Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.

1 2 3

Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: 4 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).

RRIA-SLOT1 RRIA-SLOT2 RRIA-DDCS

Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 1 of the drive Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 2 of the drive

5 6

7 Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set at 16. For directions, see RRIA-01 Resolver Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].

RTAC03-SLOT1 RTAC03-SLOT2 RTAC03-DDCS

Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: option slot 1 of the drive Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: option slot 2 of the drive

8 9

Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: 10 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set at 16. For directions, see RRIA-01 Resolver Interface Module Users Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].

98.02 FIELDBUS MODULE NO FIELDBUS

Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See chapter Fieldbus control. No communication. 1 The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 1 2 of the drive, or via CH0 on the RDCO board. See also parameter group 51 FIELDBUS DATA. The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on 3 the RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL.

ADVANT

Actual signals and parameters

127

No.

Name Value STD MODBUS

Description The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter group 52 STANDARD MODBUS. Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. DI7 and DI8 are from this module. DI9 and DI10 are from a second module. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]).

FbEq 4

98.03 DI/0 EXT MODULE 1

NDIO

NO RDIO-SLOT1

Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module.

2 3

RDIO-SLOT2

RDIO-DDCS

Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. DI7 through DI9 are from this module. DI10 is from a second module. Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).

98.04 DI/0 EXT MODULE 2

Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 2 (optional) and defines the type and connection interface of the module. Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. If 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is an NDIO, DI9 and DI10 are from this module, otherwise only DI10 is. Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]). 1

NDIO

NO RDIO-SLOT1

Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. If 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is an NDIO, DI9 and DI10 are from this module, otherwise only DI10 is. Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. If 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is an NDIO, DI9 and DI10 are from this module, otherwise only DI10 is.

2 3

RDIO-SLOT2

RDIO-DDCS

Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. If 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is an NDIO, DI9 and DI10 are from this module, otherwise only DI10 is. Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see Users Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).

Actual signals and parameters

128

No.

Name Value

Description Activates the communication to an optional Analog I/O Extension Module. Note: Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are OK: - The module node number is set to 5. - The input signal type selections matches the actual signals (mA/V). - The operation mode selection matches the applied input signals (unipolar/bipolar).

FbEq

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE

NAIO

Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]).

NO RAIO-SLOT1 RAIO-SLOT2 RAIO-DDCS

Communication inactive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive.

2 3 4

Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).

98.09 DI DEBOUNCE FILT 01000 ms

Digital input de-bounce filter. Prevents unwanted ON/OFF switching of the digital inputs. Setting range. 1 = 1 ms

Actual signals and parameters

129

No.

Name Value

Description Activates the communication to the analog I/O extension module and reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement function. The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the module. For more information on the temperature measurement function, see parameter group 35 MTR TEMP MEAS. The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the module is shown in table below.Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are appropriate for the motor temperature measurement: 1. The module node number is 9. 2. The input signal type selections are the following: - for one Pt100 sensor measurement, set the range to 02 V. - for two to three Pt100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to 010 V. 3. The operation mode selection is unipolar. Motor 1 Temperature Measurement AO1 Feeds a constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of 35.01 MTR1 TEMP SEL: - AO1 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100 - AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC AI1 AO2 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor. Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of 35.04 MTR2 TEMP SEL: - AO2 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100, - AO2 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC AI2 Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor. Motor 2 Temperature Measurement

FbEq

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP

NAIO

Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. For instructions, see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]).

NO RAIO-SLOT1

Inactive. Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number is not required. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).

2 3

RAIO-SLOT2

Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number is not required. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).

Actual signals and parameters

130

No.

Name Value RAIO-DDCS

Description

FbEq

Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: 5 Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link. Note: Set the module node number to 9. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).

98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC UNIPOLAR A15 BIPOLAR A15 98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC UNIPOLAR AI6 BIPOLAR AI6

This parameter defines the configuration for external analog input AI1. The selection must match the dip switch settings in the module. Integer default. Integer. This parameter defines the configuration for external analog input AI2. The selection must match the dip switch settings in the module. Integer default Integer. Drive set-up. Selects the display language. British English American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. German Italian Spanish Portuguese Dutch French Danish Finnish Swedish Czech Polish Russian Selects the application macro. See chapter Application macros for more information. Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new settings become active immediately and stay active even if the power of the drive is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings (factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 1 2

99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH (AM) DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPANOL PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS FRANCAIS DANSK SUOMI SVENSKA CESKY POLSKI /LOC1 PO-RUS /LOC2 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO

DRAW DANCER TENSION LOADSHARE USER 1 LOAD

Section with draw control. Section with a dancer. Section with tension/torque control. Section that is a loadshare follower. User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.

1 2 3 4 5

Actual signals and parameters

131

No.

Name Value USER 1 SAVE

Description Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model. Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE.

FbEq 6

USER 2 LOAD

User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application. Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor model. Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See parameter 99.03.

USER 2 SAVE

99.03 APPLIC RESTORE

Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02). - If a standard macro is active, the parameter values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions: parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor model remains unchanged. - If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions: Settings of parameters 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG and 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO remain unchanged. Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to the same principles when a macro is changed to another.

NO YES 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC SCALAR

No restoring. Restoring. Selects the motor control mode. Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. Scalar control is suitable in cases where the DTC cannot be applied. The scalar mode is recommended: - for multimotor drives with variable number of motors - when the nominal current is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive (inverter). Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. There are some standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode: Motor Identification Run (group 99 START-UP DATA), Speed Limits (group 20 LIMITS), Torque limit (group 20 LIMITS), DC Hold (group 21 START/STOP), DC Magnetizing (group 21 START/STOP), Speed Controller Tuning (group 23 SPEED CONTROL), Torque Control (group 24 TORQ REF CTRL), Flux Optimization (group 26 FLUX CONTROL), Flux Braking (group 26 FLUX CONTROL), Underload Function (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Phase Loss (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Stall Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS).

0 65535 0 65535

99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 2 x UN

Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. Voltage. Allowed range is 1/22 UN of the drive. 1=1V

Actual signals and parameters

132

No.

Name Value

Description Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.

FbEq

99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT

1/62 x I2hd

Allowed range: 1/62 I2hd of ACS 600 (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = DTC). Allowed range: 02 I2hd of ACS 600 (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR).

10 = 1 A

99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 8300 Hz 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED

Defines the nominal motor frequency. Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically) Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead! Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well. 100 = 1 Hz

118000 rpm 99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 09000 kW 012064 Hp 99.10 MOTOR ID RUN

Selects the motor control mode. Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate. Nominal motor power. Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run Procedure is described in chapter Start-up. Note: The ID Run (STANDARD) should be selected.

1 = 1 rpm

10 = 1 kW 10 = 1 Hp

NO STANDARD

No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing 1 the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The 2 ID Run takes about one minute. Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment. Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 5080% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!

REDUCED

Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run: 3 - If mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment) - If flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals). Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction. WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 5080% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!

Actual signals and parameters

133

No.

Name Value

Description Nominal motor torque. Automatically calculated from Group 99 parameters. Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be typed only using a drive PC tool.

FbEq 10 = 1 Nm 10 = 1 lbft -

99.11 CALC MOTOR TORQUE 99.12 DEVICE NAME

Actual signals and parameters

134

Actual signals and parameters

135

Fieldbus control

Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network.

System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus controller via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed between the external control interface and other available sources, for example digital and analog inputs. The following diagram shows the control interfaces and I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus controller Fieldbus ACS800 Other devices (* (* Advant controller (e.g. AC 800M, AC 80)

Fieldbus adapter Rxxx Slot 1 RMIO board RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link Slot 1 or 2 RDCO comm. module CH1 AIMA-01 I/O (DDCS) adapter module CH0 (DDCS) Fieldbus adapter Nxxx or (*

Controller Modbus

I/O adapter RTAC/RDIO/RAIO

Data Flow Control Word (CW) References Status Word (SW) Actual values Parameter R/W requests/responses
(*

Process I/O (cyclic)

Service messages (acyclic)

Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.

Fieldbus control

136

Redundant fieldbus control It is possible to connect two fieldbuses to the drive with the following adapter configuration: Type Rxxx fieldbus adapter module (not RMBA-01) is installed in drive slot 1. RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module is installed in drive slot 2.
E.g. PROFIBUS ACS800 RMIO board RPBA-01 adapter PROFIBUS-DP link Slot 1 RMBA-01 adapter std. Modbus link Slot 2 Modbus

The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section The fieldbus control interface on page 143) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 to FIELDBUS or STD MODBUS. In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.

Fieldbus control

137

Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module

Fieldbus adapters for several communication protocols are available (e.g. PROFIBUS and Modbus). Rxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive. Nxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are connected to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. Note: For instructions on setting up an RMBA-01 module, see section Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link on page 139. Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Fieldbus Control Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS FIELDBUS Initializes communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module. Activates module set-up parameters (Group 51).

ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 51.01 MODULE TYPE 51.02 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 2) 51.26 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 26) 51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH* Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.

These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.

(0) DONE (1) REFRESH

Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE. Displays the required CPI firmware revision of the fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file stored in the memory of the drive. The CPI firmware version of the fieldbus adapter (refer to par. 51.32) must contain the same or a later CPI version to be compatible. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.

51.28 FILE CPI FW REV*

xyz (binary coded decimal

51.29 FILE CONFIG ID*

xyz (binary coded decimal)

Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file identification stored in the memory of the drive. This information is drive control program-dependent.

Fieldbus control

138

Parameter

Alternative Settings xyz (binary coded decimal)

Setting for Fieldbus Control

Function/Information

51.30 FILE CONFIG REV*

Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration file revision stored in the memory of the drive. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 1 = revision 0.01.

51.31 FBA STATUS*

(0) IDLE (1) EXEC. INIT (2) TIME OUT (3) CONFIG ERROR (4) OFF-LINE (5) ON-LINE (6) RESET

Displays the status of the adapter module. IDLE = Adapter not configured. EXEC. INIT = Adapter initializing. TIME OUT = A time out has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive. CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration error. The major or minor revision code of the CPI program revision in the drive is not the revision required by the module (refer to par. 51.32) or configuration file upload has failed more than five times. OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line. ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line. RESET = Adapter performing a hardware reset.

51.32 FBA CPI FW REV*

Displays the CPI program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.

51.33 FBA APPL FW REV*

Displays the control program revision of the module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.

*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed.

After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (section The fieldbus control interface on page 143) must be checked and adjusted where necessary. The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when parameter 51.27 is activated.

Fieldbus control

139

Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link

An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only). Before configuring the drive for Modbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual. The following table lists the parameters, which need to be defined when setting up communication through the standard Modbus link.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control through Standard Modbus Link Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS STD MODBUS Initializes communication between drive (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbusprotocol controller. Activates communication parameters in group 52.

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 52.01 52.02 1 to 247 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 ODD EVEN NONE1STOPBIT NONE2STOPBIT Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus Link. Defines the communication speed for the Standard Modbus Link.

52.03

Selects the parity setting for the Standard Modbus Link.

After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (section The fieldbus control interface on page 143) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.

Fieldbus control

140

Modbus addressing In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from Fieldbus Controller to Drive Address 40001 40002 40003 40007 40008 40009 Contents Control Word Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 Reference 4 Reference 5 Data from Drive to Fieldbus Controller Address 40004 40005 40006 40010 40011 40012 Contents Status Word Actual 1 Actual 2 Actual 3 Actual 4 Actual 5

More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website http://www.modicon.com.

Fieldbus control

141

Setting up communication through Advant controller

The Advant controller is connected via DDCS link to channel CH0 of the RDCO module. AC 800M Advant Controller DriveBus connection CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface required. See CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface Users Manual, [3AFE 68237432 (English)]. Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See table below. For more information, see AC 800M Controller Hardware Manual [3BSE027941 (English)], AC 800M/C Communication, Protocols and Design Manual [3BSE028811 (English),] ABB Industrial Systems, Vsters, Sweden. AC 80 Advant Controller Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. See table below. CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) Optical ModuleBus connection TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required. The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components and the TB810 is equipped with 10 MBd components. All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not match with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the equipment it is connected to. With RDCO Communication Option Module, the Interface is selected as follows:
Optional ModuleBus Port Interface TB811 TB810 DDCS Communication Option Module RDCO-01 RDCO-02 RDCO-03

If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface must be used. The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up communication between the drive and Advant controller.

Fieldbus control

142

Table 1 Setting up communication

Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control Through CH0 Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 98.02 NO FIELDBUS ADVANT STD MODBUS 0254 ADVANT Initializes communication between drive (fibre optic channel CH0) and Advant controller. The transmission speed is 4 Mbit/s. 1125 17125 Defines the node address for DDCS channel CH0.

70.01

AC 800M ModuleBus AC 80 ModuleBus FCI (CI810A)

17125

After the communication initialization parameters have been set, the drive control parameters must be checked and adjusted where necessary. In an Optical ModuleBus connection, channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows: 1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16. 2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result. For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must be set to 16 1 + 10 = 26.

Fieldbus control

143

The fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets. One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words (DW). The Winder Program supports the use of six data sets, three in each direction. Table 2 Default connections for the cyclical fieldbus communication.
Data from Fieldbus Controller to Drive *Index Word Contents Selector Scaling Data from Drive to Fieldbus Controller *Index Word Contents Selector

Main Reference Data set DS1 1 2 1st word 2nd word Main cmd wd Ext1 ref 90.01 90.02 See Table 3 on page 145. 20000 = 11.05 EXT1 REF MAXIMUM See Table 4 on page 146.

Main Actual Signal data set DS2 4 5 1st word 2nd word Actual 1 Actual 2 92.01 92.02

3rd word

Aux cmd wd

(Fixed)

3rd word

Actual 3

92.03

Auxiliary Reference Data set DS3 7 1st word Tension setpoint Reference 5 Core spd match val 90.04 20000 = 63.14 MAXIMUM TENSION

Auxiliary Actual Signal data set DS4 10 1st word Actual 4 92.04

8 9

2nd word 3rd word

90.05 90.06 0 = -61.03 DRAW RANGE, 20000 = +61.03 DRAW RANGE

11 12

2nd word 3rd word

Actual 5 Actual 6

92.05 92.06

Auxiliary Reference Data Set DS5 13 14 15 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Draw** Reference 7 Reference 8 (Fixed) 90.08 90.09 +100 = +1%

Auxiliary Actual Signal Data Set DS6 16 17 18 1st word 2nd word 3rd word Actual 7 Actual 8 Actual 9 92.07 92.08 92.09

* The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. The function is dependent on the type of the fieldbus adapter ** This draw is not controlled by Group 61; it is always added to the speed reference.

Note: These scaling values are only applicable when Par. 90.0x is left at 0.

Fieldbus control

144

The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is effective when the active control location is set to FIELDBUS. The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word. The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. See section Communication profiles on page 145 for information on the composition of the Control Word and the Status Word. References References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the twos complement from the corresponding positive reference value. Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they can be negative or positive. Notes: 100% reference is defined by parameter 11.05 External reference scaling parameter 11.04 is also in effect. Actual Values Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group 92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function; please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters.

Fieldbus control

145

Communication profiles
The ACS800 Winder supports one communication profile based on CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile. Table 3 DataSet 1 Word 1 - Fieldbus Main Cmd Wd (Actual Signal 06.01)
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name DRIVE ENABLE USER 2 MACRO SEL Reserved RUN CMD REVERSE CMD CONSTANT SPEED SEL CONSTANT SPEED SEL FAULT RESET CMD INCHING SPEED SEL PAYOUT SPEED SEL REMOTE CMD (Profibus only) RELAY OUTPUT 1 RELAY OUTPUT 2 RELAY OUTPUT 3 HEARTBEAT Reserved See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.02. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.04. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.04. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 12.06. Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.05.

Fieldbus control

146

Table 4 DataSet 1 Word 3 - Fieldbus Aux Cmd Wd (Actual Signal 06.03)

Bit 0 1 2 3 Name DANCER/TENSION ENABLE DANCER/TENSION WEB2 SEL MODE TRANSITION (TO TORQ) DANCER/TENSION ZERO I-TIME CORE SPEED INCREASE CORE SPEED DECREASE Reserved EXT2 SEL ACC/DEC2 SEL DANCER/TENSION REG REV See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 11.02. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 22.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 62.08 and 63.08. Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 62.09 and 63.09. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 62.23 and 63.23. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 63.16. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 62.04 and 63.04. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 61.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 61.01.

4 5 612 13 14 15

Fieldbus control

147

Table 5 Main Status Word (Actual Signal 02.26)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name RDY_ON RDY_RUN RDY_REF TRIPPED OFF_2_STA OFF_3_STA SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 9 10 REMOTE ABOVE_LIMIT 1 0 1 Warning/Alarm. No Warning/Alarm. OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits). Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits). Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2). Drive control location: LOCAL. Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit (32.02). Valid in both rotation directions regardless of value of 32.02. Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit. External Control Location 2 (EXT2) selected. External Control Location 1 (EXT1) selected. External Run Enable signal received. No External Run Enable received. Abs drive actual speed is zero. Abs drive actual speed is above zero. 200 ms square wave. (send back on Main Cmd Word bit 14) Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic channel CH0). Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK. STATE/Description READY TO SWITCH ON. NOT READY TO SWITCH ON. READY TO OPERATE. OFF1 ACTIVE. OPERATION ENABLED. OPERATION INHIBITED. FAULT. No fault. OFF2 inactive. OFF2 ACTIVE. OFF3 inactive. OFF3 ACTIVE. SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

0 11 12 13 14 15 EXT CTRL LOC EXT RUN ENABLE AT ZERO SPEED HEARTBEAT 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Fieldbus control

148

Table 6 Auxiliary Status Word (Actual Signal 02.27).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 Name Reserved OUT OF WINDOW Reserved MAGNETIZED Reserved SYNC RDY 1 START NOT DONE IDENTIF RUN DONE START INHIBITION LIMITING TORQ CONTROL ZERO SPEED INTERNAL SPEED FB M/F COMM ERR Reserved Position counter synchronized. Drive has not been started after changing the motor parameters in group 99. Motor ID Run successfully completed. Prevention of unexpected start-up active. Control at a limit. See actual signal 02.23 LIMIT WORD 1. Torque reference is followed*. Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit (4% of synchronous speed). Internal speed feedback followed. Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication error*. Flux has been formed in the motor. Speed difference is out of the window (in speed control)*. Description

*See Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY58962180 [English]).

Fieldbus control

149

Table 7 Auxiliary Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 02.28)

Bit 0 1 2...4 5 6 7...15 Name SPEED 1 LIM SPEED 2 LIM Reserved TORQUE 1 LIM TORQUE 2 LIM Reserved The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the TORQUE1 supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the TORQUE2 supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Description Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 1. See group 32 SUPERVISION. Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision limit 2. See group 32 SUPERVISION.

Table 8 Pack Status Bits (Actual Signal 03.15)

Bit 0 1...2 3 4 5 Name WEB LOSS DETECTED Reserved EXT2 SELECTED Reserved DANCER/TENSION CTRL ON WEB2 SELECTED The drive is running and the PI regulator is controlling web tension. See chapter Actual signals and parameters Parameters 62.09 and 63.09. Web 2 has been selected and the corresponding gain, ITime and web dimensions are being used. See chapter Actual signals and parameters - Groups 62, 63 and 64 The web tension control is using the stall setpoints. See chapter Actual signals and parameters - Groups 62 and 63 Ext2 control and reference has been selected. See chapter Actual signals and parameters - Groups 10 and 11 Description A web loss has been detected. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameters 60.03 and 60.04.

7 8...15

DANCER/TENSION STALL ON Reserved

Fieldbus control

150

Table 9 Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.15).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 13 14 15 Name START INHIBIT Reserved THERMISTOR MOTOR TEMP ACx 800 TEMP ENCODER ERR T MEAS ALM Reserved COMM MODULE Reserved EARTH FAULT Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.

Table 10 Alarm Word 2 (Actual Signal 02.16).

Bit 0 1 2, 3 4 5, 6 7 8 9 10 11, 12 13 14, 15 Name Reserved UNDERLOAD Reserved ENCODER Reserved POWFAIL FILE (FFA0) ALM (OS_17) MOTOR STALL AI < MIN FUNC Reserved PANEL LOSS Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description

Fieldbus control

151

Table 11 Alarm Word 3 (Actual Signal 02.17)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 515 Name Reserved MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP BRAKE ACKN SLEEP MODE Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description

Table 12 Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.18).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 Name SHORT CIRC OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT ACS 800 TEMP EARTH FAULT THERMISTOR MOTOR TEMP SYSTEM_FAULT UNDERLOAD OVERFREQ Reserved A fault is indicated by 02.21 System Fault Word. For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.

Fieldbus control

152

Table 13 Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 02.19).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name SUPPLY PHASE NO MOT DATA DC UNDERVOLT Reserved RUN DISABLED ENCODER FLT I/O COMM AMBIENT TEMP EXTERNAL FLT OVER SWFREQ AI < MIN FUNC PPCC LINK COMM MODULE PANEL LOSS MOTOR STALL MOTOR PHASE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.

Table 14 Fault Word 3 (Actual Signal 02.20)

Bit 0 1 2 3 415 Name Reserved MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP BRAKE ACKN Reserved For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing. Description

Fieldbus control

153

Table 15 System Fault Word (Actual Signal 02.21).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name FLT (F1_7) USER MACRO FLT (F1_4) FLT (F1_5) FLT (F2_12) FLT (F2_13) FLT (F2_14) FLT (F2_15) FLT (F2_16) FLT (F2_17) FLT (F2_18) FLT (F2_19) FLT (F2_3) FLT (F2_1) FLT (F2_0) Reserved Description Factory default parameter file error. User Macro file error. FPROM operating error. FPROM data error. Internal time level 2 overflow. Internal time level 3 overflow. Internal time level 4 overflow. Internal time level 5 overflow. State machine overflow. Control program execution error. Control program execution error. Illegal instruction. Register stack overflow. System stack overflow. System stack underflow.

Fieldbus control

154

The FAULTED INT INFO Word includes information on the location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT, SHORT CIRCUIT, ACS800 TEMP, TEMP DIF and POWERF INV (see 02.18 FAULT WORD 1, 02.19 FAULT WORD 2, and chapter Fault tracing). Table 16 INT Fault Info Word (Actual Signal 02.22).
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1214 15 Name INT 1 FLT INT 2 FLT INT 3 FLT INT 4 FLT INT 5 FLT INT 6 FLT INT 7 FLT INT 8 FLT INT 9 FLT INT 10 FLT INT 11 FLT INT 12 FLT Reserved PBU FLT PBU board fault Description INT 1 board fault INT 2 board fault INT 3 board fault INT 4 board fault INT 5 board fault INT 6 board fault INT 7 board fault INT 8 board fault INT 9 board fault INT 10 board fault INT 11 board fault INT 12 board fault

Used only with parallel connected inverters. Inverter Block Diagram RMIO Upper-leg IGBTs RMIO INT Lower-leg IGBTs U V W INT PBU Application and Motor Control Board Main Circuit Interface Board PPCS Link Branching Unit

Inverter Unit Block Diagram (two to four parallel Inverters) RMIO PBU CH3 CH1 CH2

INT

INT

INT

...

Fieldbus control

155

Table 17 Limit Word 1 (Actual Signal 02.23).

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name TORQ MOTOR LIM SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM TORQ_MIN_LIM TORQ_MAX_LIM TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM FLUX_MIN_LIM FREQ_MIN_LIMIT FREQ_MAX_LIMIT DC_UNDERVOLT DC_OVERVOLT TORQUE LIMIT FREQ_LIMIT Active Limit Pull-out limit. Speed control torque min. limit. Speed control torque max. limit. User-defined current limit. Internal current limit. Any torque min. limit. Any torque max. limit. Torque reference min. limit. Torque reference max. limit. Flux reference min. limit. Speed/Frequency min. limit. Speed/Frequency max. limit. DC undervoltage limit. DC overvoltage limit. Any torque limit. Any speed/frequency limit.

Table 18 Follower MCW (Actual Signal 02.25)

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 815 Name DRIVE ENABLED Reserved REVERSE CMD DRIVE RUNNING DIAMETER RESET Reserved HEARTBEAT FAULT RESET CMD Reserved See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.04. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.02. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 10.01. See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 65.03. Description See chapter Actual signals and parameters, parameter 16.01.

Fieldbus control

156

The LIMIT WORD INV Word includes faults and warnings, which occur when the output current limit of the drive is exceeded. The current limit protects the drive in various cases, e.g. integrator overload, high IGBT temperature etc. Table 19 Limit Word Inv (Actual Signal 02.41)
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 Name INTEGRAT 200 INTEGRAT 150 INT LOW FREQ INTG PP TEMP PP OVER TEMP PP OVERLOAD Description Current limit at 200% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at 150% integrator overload. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature with low output frequency (<10 Hz). Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is not active.* Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model is active. Current limit at high IGBT junction to case temperature. Temperature model is active. If the IGBT junction to case temperature continues to rise in spite of the current limitation, PP OVERLOAD alarm or fault occurs. See chapter Fault tracing. 6 7 8 9 10 1115 INV POW LIM INV TRIP CUR OVERLOAD CUR CONT DC CUR CONT OUT CUR Reserved Current limit at inverter output power limit Current limit at inverter overcurrent trip limit Maximum inverter overload current limit. See 20.03. Continuous dc-current limit Continuous output current limit (Icont.max)

*Not active with ACS800 default settings.

Fieldbus control

157

Fault tracing

Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.

Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive.

Warning and fault indications

A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status. Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information. If not, an ABB representative should be contacted. If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted with the LEDs as standard). The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus communication. (See chapter Fieldbus control.)

How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.

Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected. The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults. When the drive power is switched off, 16 of the latest faults are stored. See chapter Control panel for more information.

Fault tracing

158

Warning messages generated by the drive

Warning ACS800 TEMP (4210) 02.15 AW 1 bit 04 Cause Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%. What to Do Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. BACKUP USED (FFA3) BATT FAILURE (5581) PC stored backup of drive parameters is downloaded into use. APBU branching unit memory backup battery error caused by - incorrect APBU switch S3 setting - too low battery voltage. BC OVERHEAT (7114) Brake chopper overload Wait until download is completed.

With parallel connected inverters, enable backup battery by setting actuator 6 of switch S3 to ON. Replace backup battery. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.

BR OVERHEAT (7112)

Brake resistor overload

Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.

CALIBRA DONE (FF37) CALIBRA REQ (FF36) COMM MODULE (7510) 02.15 AW 1 bit 12 (programmable Fault Function 30.18, 30.19)

Calibration of output current transformers is completed. Calibration of output current transformers is required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar control and scalar fly start feature is on. Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.

Continue normal operation.

Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a while. Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 FIELDBUS DATA (for fieldbus adapter) - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.

Fault tracing

159

Warning CUR UNBAL xx (2330) 02.15 AW1 bit 14 (programmable Fault Function 30.17)

Cause Drive has detected excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. This can be caused by external fault (ground fault, motor, motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged inverter component). xx (212) refers to inverter module number.

What to Do Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no ground fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

DC BUS LIM (3211) ENC CABLE (7310) ENCODER A<>B (7302) ENCODER ERR (7301) 02.15 AW 1 bit 05 FAN OTEMP (FF83)

Drive limits torque due to too high or too low intermediate circuit DC voltage. Pulse encoder phase signal is missing.

Informative alarm Check Fault Function parameters. Check pulse encoder and its wiring. Check pulse encoder interface module and its wiring.

Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan. Supervision is in use in step-up drives.

Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B. Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring, group 50 PULSE ENCODER settings. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.

GROUND FAULT 02.15 AW 1 bit 14 (programmable Fault Function 30.17)

Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.

Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

HW RECONF RQ (FF38) ID DONE (FF32) ID MAGN (FF31) ID MAGN REQ (FF30)

Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation. Drive has performed motor identification magnetization and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Motor identification magnetization is on. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Motor identification is required. This warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. Drive expects user to select how motor identification should be performed: By Identification Magnetization or by ID Run.

Wait until alarm POWEROFF! activates and switch control board power off to validate inverter type change. Continue drive operation.

Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed. Start Identification Magnetization by pressing Start key, or select ID Run and start (see parameter 99.10).

Fault tracing

160

Warning ID N CHANGED (FF68) ID RUN (FF35) ID RUN SEL (FF33) IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)

Cause Drive ID number has been changed from 1.

What to Do Change ID number back to 1. See chapter Control panel. Wait until drive indicates that motor identification Run is completed. Press Start key to start Identification Run.

Motor identification Run is on.

Motor Identification Run is selected, and drive is ready to start ID Run. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Excessive input choke temperature

Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.

INV CUR LIM (2212)

Internal inverter current or power limit has been exceeded.

Reduce load or increase ramp time. Limit inverter actual power or decrease lineside converter reactive power generation reference value (parameter 95.06). Check Fault Function parameters.

INV DISABLED (3200) INV OVERTEMP (4290)

Optional DC switch has opened while unit was stopped. Converter module temperature is excessive.

Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit. Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary.

IO CONF

Input or output of optional I/O extension or fieldbus module has been selected as signal interface in control program but communication to appropriate I/O extension module has not been set accordingly. Macro is restoring or User macro is being saved. Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module.

Check Fault Function parameters. Check group 98 OPTION MODULES.

MACRO CHANGE (FF69) MOD BOARD T (FF88)

Wait until drive has finished task.

Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature.

Fault tracing

161

Warning MOD CHOKE T (FF89) 02.17 AW 3 bit 13 MOT CUR LIM (2300)

Cause Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.

What to Do Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system.

Drive limits motor current according to current limit defined by parameter 20.03.

Reduce load or increase ramp time. Increase parameter 20.03 value. Check Fault Function parameters.

MOTOR STALL (7121) 02.16 AW 2 bit 09 (programmable Fault Function 30.10) MOTOR STARTS (FF34) MOTOR TEMP (4310) 02.15 AW 1 bit 03 (programmable Fault Function 30.0430.09) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)

Motor is operating in stall region due to e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and drive ratings. Check Fault Function parameters.

Motor Identification Run starts. This warning belongs to ID Run procedure. Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.

Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed. Check motor ratings, load and cooling. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.

Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 35.02.

Check value of alarm limit. Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.

MOTOR 2 TEMP (4313)

Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 35.05.

Check value of alarm limit. Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.

MOT POW LIM (FF86)

Drive limits motor power according to limits defined by parameters 20.11 and 20.12.

Informative alarm Check parameter 20.11 and 20.12 settings. Check Fault Function parameters.

MOT TORQ LIM (FF85)

Drive limits motor torque according to calculated motor pull-out torque limit and minimum and maximum torque limits defined by parameters 20.13 and 20.14. Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.

Informative alarm Check parameter 20.13 and 20.14 settings.

PANEL LOSS (5300)

Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters.

Fault tracing

162

Warning POINTER ERROR (FFD0) ->POWEROFF! (FF39) PP OVERLOAD (5482)

Cause Source selection (pointer) parameter points to non existing parameter index. Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been changed. Inverter type is usually changed at factory or during drive implementation. Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This can be caused by excessive load at low frequencies (e.g. fast direction change with excessive load and inertia). Running time of inverter cooling fan has exceeded its estimated life time. Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated.

What to Do Check source selection (pointer) parameter settings. Switch control board power off to validate inverter type change. Increase ramp time. Reduce load.

REPLACE FAN (4280) START INHIBI (FF7A) 02.15 AW 1 bit 0 START INTERL (FF8D) SYNCRO SPEED (FF87)

Replace fan. Reset fan run time counter 01.44. Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).

No Start Interlock signal received.

Check circuit connected to Start Interlock input on RMIO board. Check nominal speed from motor rating plate and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.

Value of motor nominal speed set to parameter 99.08 is not correct: Value is too near synchronous speed of motor. Tolerance is 0.1%. This warning is active only in DTC mode. Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 C. Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters.

TEMP DIF xx y (4380)

Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.

THERMISTOR (4311) 02.15 AW 1 bit 02 (programmable Fault Function 30.0430.05) T MEAS ALM (FF91) 02.15 AW 1 bit 06 UNDERLOAD FF6A) 02.16 AW 2 bit 01 (programmable Fault Function 30.13)

Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is THERMISTOR.

Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.

Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range.

Check connections of motor temperature measurement circuit. See chapter Program features for circuit diagram. Check for problem in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.

Motor load is too low due to e.g. release mechanism in driven equipment.

Fault tracing

163

Warning messages generated by the control panel

Warning DOWNLOADING FAILED Cause Download function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from panel to drive. What to Do Make sure panel is in local mode. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative. DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE NO COMMUNICATION (X) Downloading is not possible while motor is running. Stop motor. Perform downloading.

Cabling problem or hardware malfunction on Panel Link

Check Panel Link connections. Press RESET key. Panel reset may take up to half a minute, please wait. Check panel type and drive control program version. Panel type is printed on panel cover. Control program version is stored in parameter 33.02. Disconnect another station from link to free ID number.

(4) = Panel type not compatible with drive control program version

NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE UPLOADING FAILED WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE

Panel Link already includes 31 stations.

No upload function has been performed.

Perform upload function before downloading. See chapter Control panel. Retry (there might be interference on link). Contact ABB representative. Stop motor, then change parameter value.

Upload function of panel has failed. No data has been copied from drive to panel. Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and warning is displayed. Parameter lock is on.

Open parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).

Fault tracing

164

Fault messages generated by the drive

Fault ACS800 TEMP (4210) 02.18 FW 1 bit 03 Cause Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip limit is 100%. What to Do Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. ACS TEMP xx y (4210) 02.18 FW 1 bit 03 Excessive internal temperature in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Failure when restoring PC stored backup of drive parameters. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against unit power. BACKUP ERROR (FFA2) Retry. Check connections. Check that parameters are compatible with drive. BC OVERHEAT (7114) Brake chopper overload Let chopper cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive. BC SHORT CIR (7113) BR BROKEN (7110) Brake resistor is not connected or it is damaged. Resistance rating of brake resistor is too high. BR OVERHEAT (7112) Brake resistor overload Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s) Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged. Check resistor and resistor connection. Check that resistance rating meets specifications. See appropriate drive hardware manual. Let resistor cool down. Check parameter settings of resistor overload protection function (see group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive. BR WIRING (7111) CHOKE OTEMP (FF82) Excessive temperature of drive output filter. Supervision is in use in step-up drives. Wrong connection of brake resistor Check resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged. Let drive cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.

Fault tracing

165

Fault COMM MODULE (7510) 02.19 FW 2 bit 12 (programmable Fault Function 30.18, 30.19)

Cause Cyclical communication between drive and master is lost.

What to Do Check status of fieldbus communication. See chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. Check parameter settings: - group 51 FIELDBUS DATA (for fieldbus adapter), or - group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for Standard Modbus Link). Check Fault Function parameters. Check cable connections. Check if master can communicate.

CTRL B TEMP (4110) 02.19 FW 2 bit 07 CURR MEAS (2211) CUR UNBAL xx (2330) 02.19 FW 1 bit 04 (programmable Fault Function 30.17)

Control board temperature is above 88 C.

Check ambient conditions. Check air flow. Check main and additional cooling fans.

Current transformer failure in output current measurement circuit Drive has detected excessive output current unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. This can be caused by external fault (earth fault, motor, motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged inverter component). xx (112) refers to inverter module number.

Check current transformer connections to Main Circuit Interface Board, INT. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

DC HIGH RUSH (FF80)

Drive supply voltage is excessive. When supply voltage is over 124% of unit voltage rating (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes to trip level (40% of nominal speed). Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U1max, where U1max is maximum value of mains voltage range. For: 400 V units, U1max is 415 V 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is: 728 VDC for 400 V units and 877 VDC for 500 V units.

Check supply voltage level, drive rated voltage and allowed voltage range of drive.

DC OVERVOLT (3210) 02.19 FW 1 bit 02

Check that overvoltage controller is on (parameter 20.05). Check mains for static or transient overvoltage. Check brake chopper and resistor (if used). Check deceleration time. Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable). Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor.

Fault tracing

166

Fault DC UNDERVOLT (3220) 02.19 FW 2 bit 02

Cause Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 U1min, where U1min is minimum value of mains voltage range. For: 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V 690 V units, U1min is 525 V. Actual voltage in intermediate circuit corresponding to mains voltage trip level is: 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 VDC for 690 V units.

What to Do Check mains supply and fuses.

ENCODER A<>B (7302) ENCODER ERR (7301) 02.19 FW 2 bit 05 GD DISABLED (FF53)

Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to terminal of phase B and vice versa. Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module and between module and drive AGPS power supply of parallel connected R8i inverter module has been switched off during run. X (112) refers to inverter module number. Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to ground fault in motor or motor cable.

Interchange connection of pulse encoder phases A and B. Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and group 50 PULSE ENCODER settings. Check Prevention of Unexpected Start-up circuit. Replace AGPS board of R8i inverter module. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check that there is no ground fault in motor or motor cables: - measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. If no ground fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

GROUND FAULT (2330) 02.18 FW 1 bit 4 (programmable Fault Function 30.17)

ID RUN FAIL (FF84) IN CHOKE TEMP (FF81)

Motor ID Run is not completed successfully.

Check maximum speed (parameter 20.02). It should be at least 80% of motor nominal speed (parameter 99.08). Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct direction and air flows freely.

Excessive input choke temperature

INT CONFIG (5410)

Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters.

Check status of inverters. See 02.02 INT FAULT INFO. Check fibre optic cables between APBU and inverter modules.

INV DISABLED (3200)

Optional DC switch has opened while unit was running or start command was given.

Close DC switch. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.

Fault tracing

167

Fault INV OVERTEMP (4290)

Cause Converter module temperature is excessive.

What to Do Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40 C, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate hardware manual. Check that ambient temperature setting is correct (parameter 95.10). Check converter module cooling air flow and fan operation. Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet filters. Change when necessary. See appropriate hardware manual. Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been prevented with air baffles. See module installation instructions. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when necessary. Reset and restart after problem is solved and let converter module cool down.

I/O COMM ERR (7000) 02.19 FW 2 bit 06

Communication error on control board, channel CH1 Electromagnetic interference

Check connections of fibre optic cables on channel CH1. Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to channel CH1. Check for proper earthing of equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.

LINE CONV (FF51)

Fault on line side converter

Shift panel from motor side converter control board to line side converter control board. See line side converter manual for fault description.

MOD BOARD T (FF88) MOD CHOKE T (FF89)

Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter module. Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i inverter module.

Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check inverter fan. Check ambient temperature. Check liquid cooling system.

MOTOR PHASE (FF56) 02.19 FW 2 bit 15 (programmable Fault Function 30.16) MOTOR STALL (7121) 02.19 FW 2 bit 14 (programmable Fault Function 30.1030.12)

One of motor phases is lost due to fault in motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) or internal fault.

Check motor and motor cable. Check thermal relay (if used). Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection.

Motor is operating in stall region due to e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and drive ratings. Check Fault Function parameters.

Fault tracing

168

Fault MOTOR TEMP (4310) 02.18FW 1 bit 06 (programmable Fault Function 30.0430.09) MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312)

Cause Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high) due to excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.

What to Do Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check Fault Function parameters.

Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 35.03.

Check value of fault limit. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc. Check value of fault limit. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc. Check motor data parameters 99.0599.09.

MOTOR 2 TEMP (4313)

Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 35.06.

NO MOT DATA (FF52) 02.19 FW 2 bit 01 OVERCURR xx (2310) 02.18 FW 1 bit 01

Motor data is not given or motor data does not match with inverter data.

Overcurrent fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number.

Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check encoder cable (including phasing). Check motor nominal values from group 99 START-UP DATA to confirm that motor model is correct. Check that there are no power factor correction or surge absorbers in motor cable.

OVERCURRENT (2310) 02.18 FW 1 bit 01

Output current exceeds trip limit.

Check motor load. Check acceleration time. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing). Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check encoder cable (including phasing).

OVERFREQ (7123) 02.18 FW 1 bit 09

Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference. Trip level is 40 Hz over operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). Operating range limits are set by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar Control active).

Check minimum/maximum speed settings. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).

Fault tracing

169

Fault OVER SWFREQ (FF55) 02.19 FW 2 bit 09 PANEL LOSS (5300) 02.19 FW 2 bit 13

Cause Switching frequency is too high.

What to Do Check motor parameter settings (group 99 START-UP DATA) Ensure that ID run has been completed successfully.

Control panel or DriveWindow selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.

Check panel connection (see appropriate hardware manual). Check control panel connector. Replace control panel in mounting platform. Check Fault Function parameters. Check DriveWindow connection.

PARAM CRC (6320)

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error

Switch control board power off and on again. Reload firmware to control board. Replace control board.

POWERFAIL (3381)

INT board powerfail in several inverter units of parallel connected inverter modules.

Check that INT board power cable is connected. Check that POW board is working correctly. Replace INT board.

POWERF INV xx (3381)

INT board powerfail in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number.

Check that INT board power cable is connected. Check that POW board is working correctly. Replace INT board.

PPCC LINK (5210) 02.19 FW 2 bit 11 PPCC LINK xx (5210) 02.19 FW 2 bit 11 PP OVERLOAD (5482)

Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty.

Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic. If RMIO is powered from external supply, ensure that supply is on. See parameter 16.09.

INT board fibre optic connection fault in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx refers to inverter module number. Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects IGBT(s) and it can be activated by short circuit at output of long motor cables. No Run enable signal received.

Check connection from inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is connected to PBU INT1 etc.) Check motor cables.

RUN DISABLED (FF54) 02.19 FW 2 bit 04 SC INV xx y (2340) 02.18 FW 1 bit 04. SHORT CIRC (2340) 02.18 FW 1 bit 00

Check setting of parameter 16.01. Switch on signal or check wiring of selected source.

Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor

Check motor and motor cable. Check power semiconductors (IGBTs) of inverter module. Check motor and motor cable. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.

Output bridge of converter unit is faulty.

Contact ABB representative.

Fault tracing

170

Fault SLOT OVERLAP (FF8A) START INHIBI (FF7A) SUPPLY PHASE (3130) 02.19 FW 2 bit 00

Cause Two option modules have same connection interface selection. Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing mains phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault. Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple is 13% of DC voltage. Excessive temperature difference between several parallel connected inverter modules. xx (112) refers to inverter module number and y refers to phase (U, V, W). Alarm is indicated when temperature difference is 15 C. Fault is indicated when temperature difference is 20 C Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by unequal current sharing between parallel connected inverters.

What to Do Check connection interface selections in group 98 OPTION MODULES. Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).

Check mains fuses. Check for mains supply imbalance.

TEMP DIF xx y (4380)

Check cooling fan. Replace fan. Check air filters.

THERMAL MODE (FF50) THERMISTOR (4311) 02.18 FW 1 bit 05 (programmable Fault Function 30.0430.05) UNDERLOAD (FF6A) 02.18 FW 1 bit 08 (programmable Fault Function 30.1330.15) USER MACRO (FFA1)

Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC for high-power motor. Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal protection mode selection is THERMISTOR.

See parameter 30.05.

Check motor ratings and load. Check start-up data. Check thermistor connections to digital input DI6.

Motor load is too low due to e.g. release mechanism in driven equipment.

Check for problem in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.

No User Macro saved or file is defective.

Create User Macro.

Fault tracing

171

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.

Terms and abbreviations

Term PB FbEq Absolute Maximum Frequency Definition Parameter address for the fieldbus communication through a Profibus link (Add 4000 in FMS Mode). Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication. Value of 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. Value of parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit.

Absolute Maximum Speed

Fieldbus addresses
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module Users Manual. Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter: All versions see column PB in the tables below. Version 1.5 or later see NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start-Up Guide [3BFE64341588 (English)]. NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter: xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter number Example: The index number for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 (dec) = 351D (hex) NMBP-01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter: 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

172

Actual signals
Index 01 01.02 01.03 01.04 01.05 01.06 01.07 01.08 01.09 01.10 01.14 01.15 01.16 01.17 01.18 01.19 01.20 01.21 01.22 01.23 01.28 01.29 01.35 01.36 01.37 01.38 01.39 01.40 01.41 01.43 01.44 01.45 02 02.01 02.02 02.03 02.04 02.05 02.06 02.07 02.08 02.09 02.10 02.11 02.12 02.13 02.14 02.15 02.16 02.17 02.18 02.19 02.20 02.21 02.22 02.23 Name ACTUAL SIGNALS MOTOR SPEED FILT FREQUENCY CURRENT TORQUE POWER DC BUS VOLTAGE MAINS VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACS800 TEMP OP HOUR COUNTER KILOWATT HOURS APPL CODE DUTY DI6-1 STATUS AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] RO3-1 STATUS AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] AO3 [mA] AO4 [mA] MOTOR 1 TEMP MOTOR 2 TEMP MOTOR TEMP EST AI5 [mA] AI6 [mA] DI7-12 STATUS RO4-7 STATUS MOTOR RUN-TIME FAN ON-TIME CTRL BOARD TEMP ACTUAL SIGNALS SPEED REF 2 SPEED REF 3 SPEED REF 4 SPEED USED REF SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED MEASURED MOTOR TORQUE FILT TORQ REF 1 TORQ REF 2 TORQ REF 3 TORQ REF 4 TORQ REF 5 TORQ USED REF ACTUAL MTR FLUX ALARM WORD 1 ALARM WORD 2 ALARM WORD 3 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT WORD 2 FAULT WORD 3 SYSTEM FAULT INT FAULT INFO LIMIT WORD 1 Short Name SPEED FREQ CURRENT TORQUE POWER DC BUS V MAINS V OUT VOLT ACS TEMP OP HOURS KW HOURS APP DUTY DI6-1 AI1 [V] AI2 [mA] AI3 [mA] RO3-1 AO1 [mA] AO2 [mA] AO3 [mA] AO4 [mA] M1 TEMP M2 TEMP MOTOR TE AI5 [mA] AI6 [mA] DI7-12 RO4-7 M RUNTME FAN TIME CTRL B T S REF 2 S REF 3 S REF 4 SPD USED SPEED ES SPEED ME TORQFILT T REF 1 T REF 2 T REF 3 T REF 4 T REF 5 T USED R ACT FLUX ALARM W1 ALARM W2 ALARM W3 FAULT W1 FAULT W2 FAULT W3 SYS FLT INFO LIMIT W1 FbEq Unit rpm Hz A % % V V V % h kWh % 065535 (Decimal) 1000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1 = 1 C 1 = 1 C 1 = 1 C 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA V mA mA 065535 (Decimal) mA mA mA mA C C C mA mA 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 1 = 10 h 1 = 10 h 1 = 1 C 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 200 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1% h h C rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm % % % % % % % % 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) Range PB 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 28 29 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 51 52 53 54 67 68 65 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73

1 = 1 Hz 10 = 1 A 10 = 1% FALSE 1 = 1 VDC 1 = 1 VAC 1 = 1 VAC % 1=1h 1 = 100 kWh 1 = 1%

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

173

Index 02.24 02.25 02.26 02.27 02.28 02.31 02.32 02.33 02.34 02.35 02.36 02.37 02.38 02.39 02.40 02.41 02.42 03 03.01 03.02 03.03 03.04 03.05 03.06 03.07 03.08 03.09 03.10 03.11 03.12 03.15 06 06.01 06.02 06.03 06.04 06.04 06.05 06.07 06.08 06.09 09 09.01 09.02 09.03 09.04 09.05 09.06 09.07

Name MAIN CTRL WORD FOLLOWER MCW MAIN STATUS WORD AUX STATUS WORD AUX STATUS WORD 4 LATEST FAULT 2.LATEST FAULT 3.LATEST FAULT 4.LATEST FAULT 5.LATEST FAULT LATEST WARNING 2.LATEST WARNING 3.LATEST WARNING 4.LATEST WARNING 5.LATEST WARNING LIMIT WORD INV MTR ACCELERATION ACTUAL SIGNALS DRAW SETPOINT TOTAL DRAW TRIM DANCER LOAD SETPT DANCER LOAD REF DANCER REG OUTPUT DANCER POSITION TENSION SETPOINT TENSION REFERENCE TENSION REG OUTPT TENSION ACTUAL TEN CALC TORQ REF CALC TTL INERTIA PACK STATUS BITS CH0 DATASETS IN DATASET 1 WORD 1 DATASET 1 WORD 2 DATASET 1 WORD 3 DATASET 2 WORD 1 DATASET 2 WORD 2 DATASET 2 WORD 3 DATASET 3 WORD 1 DATASET 3 WORD 2 DATASET 3 WORD 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS AI1 SCALED AI2 SCALED AI3 SCALED AI5 SCALED AI6 SCALED LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2

Short Name MAIN CW FOLL MCW MAIN SW AUX SW AUX SW4 LAST FLT 2.FAULT 3.FAULT 4.FAULT 5.FAULT LAST WRN 2.WARN 3.WARN 4.WARN 5.WARN LIM WD INV MTR ACC DRAW SP TTL SPNT DAN LD S DAN LD R DAN REG DAN POS TEN SP TEN REF TEN REG TEN ACT CALC TRQ INERTIA STATU BIT DS1 WD1 DS1 WD2 DS1 WD3 DS3 WD1 DS3 WD2 DS3 WD3 DS5 WD1 DS5 WD2 DS5 WD3 AI1 SCAL AI2 SCAL AI3 SCAL AI5 SCAL AI6 SCAL

FbEq

Unit

Range 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal) 065535 (Decimal)

1 = 1 rpm/s 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 10 = 1% 10 = 1% 10 = 1% 10 = 1 mm 10 = 1 inch 10 = 1 N 10 = 1 lb 10 = 1 N 10 = 1 lb 10 = 1% 10 = 1 N 10 = 1 lb 1 = 1 Nm 1 = 1 lbft 1 = 1 kgm2 1 = 1 lbft2

rpm/s % % % % % mm inch N lb N lb % N lb Nm lbft kgm2 lbft2 065535 (Decimal) - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767 - 3276832767

PB 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 90 -

2000 = 1 V 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA 1000 = 1 mA

020000 020000 020000 020000 020000

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

174

Parameters
Index 10 10.01 10.02 10.03 10.04 10.05 10.06 11 11.01 11.03 11.04 11.05 11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.10 11.11 11.12 11.13 12 12.01 12.02 12.03 12.04 12.05 12.06 12.07 12.08 12.09 13 13.01 13.03 13.04 13.05 13.06 13.08 13.09 13.10 13.11 13.13 13.14 13.15 13.16 13.18 13.19 13.20 13.21 13.23 13.24 13.25 14 14.01 14.03 14.04 14.05 Name/Selection START/STOP/DIR EXT1 STRT/STOP EXT1 DIRECTION EXT2 STRT/STOP EXT2 DIRECTION EXT1 STRT PTR EXT2 STRT PTR REFERENCE SELECT EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1 REF SELECT EXT1 REF MINIMUM EXT1 REF MAXIMUM EXT2 REF SELECT EXT2 REF MINIMUM EXT2 REF MAXIMUM DIG POT RATE 1 sec DIG POT RATE 2 sec EXT1/EXT2 SEL PTR EXT1 REF PTR EXT2 REF PTR CONSTANT SPEEDS CONST SPEED SEL CONST SPD 1 CONST SPD 2 INCH SPD SEL INCH SPD 1 TAKE-UP / PAYOUT SPEED CHANGE CNST SPD RUN SEL TAKEUP/PAYOUT PTR ANALOG INPUTS MINIMUM AI1 SCALE AI1 FILTER AI1 ms INVERT AI1 MINIMUM AI2 SCALE AI2 FILTER AI2 ms INVERT AI2 MINIMUM AI3 SCALE AI3 FILTER AI3 ms INVERT AI3 MINIMUM AI5 SCALE AI5 FILTER AI5 ms INVERTAI5 MINIMUM AI6 SCALE AI6 FILTER AI6 ms INVERT AI6 RELAY OUTPUTS RO1 POINTER RO1 TON DELAY RO1 TOFF DELAY RO2 POINTER DRAW DI1 FORWARD DI1 FORWARD +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 EXT KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm 30 15 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SEL 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm MNSTRT REQ +.000.000.00 0V 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO +.002.026.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.02 DANCER DI1 FORWARD DI1 FORWARD +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 EXT1 KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm 30 15 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SEL 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm MNSTRT REQ +.000.000.00 0V 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO +.002.026.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.02 TENSION DI1 FORWARD DI1 FORWARD +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 EXT1 KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm 30 15 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SEL 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm MNSTRT REQ +.000.000.00 0V 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO +.002.026.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.02 LOADSHARE DI1 FORWARD DI1 FORWARD +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 EXT1 KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm KEYPAD 0.0 rpm 1500.0 rpm 30 15 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NOT SEL 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm NOT SEL 0.0 rpm MNSTRT REQ +.000.000.00 0V 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0 mA 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO 0V 100 100 NO +.002.026.01 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.02 PB 101 102 103 104 105 106 126 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 176 178 179 180 181 183 184 185 186 188 189 190 191 193 194 195 196 198 199 200 201 203 204 205

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

175

Index 14.07 14.08 14.09 14.11 14.12 14.13 14.15 14.17 14.19 15 15.01 15.03 15.04 15.05 15.06 15.08 15.09 15.10 15.11 15.13 15.14 15.15 15.16 15.18 15.19 15.20 16 16.01 16.02 16.03 16.04 16.05 16.06 16.07 16.09 20 20.01 20.02 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.07 20.08 20.10 20.11 20.12 20.13 20.14 20.15 20.16 20.17 20.18 20.19 20.20 20.21

Name/Selection RO2 TON DELAY RO2 TOFF DELAY RO3 POINTER RO3 TON DELAY RO3 TOFF DELAY RO4 POINTER RO5 POINTER RO6 POINTER RO7 POINTER ANALOG OUTPUTS AO1 POINTER MINIMUM AO1 FILTER AO1 ms NOM VALUE AO1 AO2 POINTER MINIMUM AO2 FILTER AO2 ms NOM VALUE AO2 AO3 POINTER MINIMUM AO3 FILTER AO3 ms NOM VALUE AO3 AO4 POINTER MINIMUM AO4 FILTER AO4 ms NOM VALUE AO4 SYS CTRL INPUTS RUN ENABLE PARAMETER LOCK PASS CODE FAULT RESET SEL USER MACRO IO CHG LOCAL LOCK PARAMETER SAVE CTRL BOARD SUPPLY LIMITS MINIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM SPEED MAXIMUM CURRENT MAXIMUM TORQUE OVERVOLTAGE CTRL UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL MINIMUM FREQ MAXIMUM FREQ SET MIN TORQ P MOTORING LIM P GENERATING LIM MIN TORQ SEL MAX TORQ SEL TORQ MIN LIM1 TORQ MIN LIM2 TORQ MAX LIM2 TORQ MIN PTR TORQ MAX PTR MIN AI SCALE MAX AI SCALE

DRAW 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.03 0.01 s 0.01s +.002.026.01 +.002.026.02 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 YES OPEN 0 DI6 NOT SEL OFF DONE INTERNAL (calculated) (calculated) 200.0% Ihd 300.0% ON ON -50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz -300.0% 300.0% -300.0% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300%

DANCER 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.03 0.01 s 0.01s +.002.026.01 +.002.026.02 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 YES OPEN 0 DI6 NOT SEL OFF DONE INTERNAL (calculated) (calculated) 200.0% Ihd 300.0% ON ON -50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz -300.0% 300.0% -300.0% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300%

TENSION 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.03 0.01 s 0.01s +.002.026.01 +.002.026.02 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 YES OPEN 0 DI6 NOT SEL OFF DONE INTERNAL (calculated) (calculated) 200.0% Ihd 300.0% ON ON -50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz -300.0% 300.0% -300.0% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300%

LOADSHARE 0.01 s 0.01 s +.002.026.03 0.01 s 0.01s +.002.026.01 +.002.026.02 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 +.001.004.00 0 mA 500 100.0 +.001.002.00 0 mA 500 1800.0 YES OPEN 0 DI6 NOT SEL OFF DONE INTERNAL (calculated) (calculated) 200.0% Ihd 300.0% ON ON -50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz -300.0% 300.0% -300.0% NEG MAX TORQ MAX LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 300.0% 0 0 0% 300%

PB 207 208 209 211 212 213 215 217 219 226 228 229 230 231 233 234 235 236 238 239 240 241 243 244 245 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 259 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 369 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

176

Index 21 21.01 21.02 21.03 21.04 21.05 21.06 21.07 21.09 21.10 21.11 22 22.01 22.02 22.03 22.04 22.05 22.06 22.07 22.08* 22.09* 22.10 23 23.01 23.02 23.03 23.04 23.05 23.06 23.07 23.08 23.09 23.10* 23.11* 23.12* 23.13* 23.14 23.15* 23.16* 23.17* 23.18* 23.19* 24 24.08 24.09 24.10 24.11 25 25.01 25.02 25.03 25.04 25.05 26 26.01 26.02 26.03

Name/Selection START/STOP START FUNCTION CONST MAGN TIME STOP FUNCTION DC HOLD DC HOLD SPEED DC HOLD CURR HOLD AT ZERO TIME E-STOP MODE ZERO SPEED DELAY E-STOP COAST DLY ACCEL/DECEL ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL ACCEL TIME 1 DECEL TIME 1 ACCEL TIME 2 DECEL TIME 2 SHAPE TIME E-STOP RAMP TIME VARIABLE SLOPE VAR SLOPE RATE CNSTSPD (JOG) RAMP SPEED CONTROL GAIN INTEGRATION TIME DERIVATION TIME ACC COMPENSATION SLIP GAIN AUTOTUNE RUN INTEG INIT VALUE DERIV FILT TIME ACC COMP FILT DAMPENING COEF P-GAIN MIN P-GAIN WEAKPOINT P-GAIN WP FILT DROOP RATE KPS TIS MIN FREQ KPS TIS MAX FREQ KPS VAL MIN FREQ TIS VAL MIN FREQ SPEED ACT FILT TORQ REF CTRL LOAD COMPENSATION TORQ TRIM SPD TORQ MAX SPD TORQ MIN SPEED REF SPEED REF SPEED MULTIPLIER SPEED CORRECTION ADDITIVE SPD REF FREQUENCY REF FLUX CONTROL FLUX OPTIMIZATION FLUX BRAKING IR-COMPENSATION

DRAW CNST DC MAGN 500.0 ms RAMP STOP NO 5 rpm 30.0% 600 STOP RAMPING 0.5 s 5s ACC/DEC 1 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.00 s 1.0 s OFF 0.00 ms 1.0 s 10.0 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 0.00% 8.0 ms 7.99 ms 2.00 10.0 0.0% 99.9 ms 0.0% 5.0 Hz 11.7 Hz 100.0% 100.0% 8.0 ms 0.00% 0.00% 300.0% -300.0% 0.0 rpm 100.00% 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0.00 Hz NO YES 0%

DANCER CNST DC MAGN 500.0 ms RAMP STOP NO 5 rpm 30.0% 600 STOP RAMPING 0.5 s 5s ACC/DEC 1 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.00 s 1.0 s OFF 0.00 ms 1.0 s 10.0 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 0.00% 8.0 ms 7.99 ms 2.00 10.0 0.0% 99.9 ms 0.0% 5.0 Hz 11.7 Hz 100.0% 100.0% 8.0 ms 0.00% 0.00% 300.0% -300.0% 0.0 rpm 100.00% 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0.00 Hz NO YES 0%

TENSION CNST DC MAGN 500.0 ms RAMP STOP NO 5 rpm 30.0% 600 STOP RAMPING 0.5 s 5s ACC/DEC 1 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.00 s 1.0 s OFF 0.00 ms 1.0 s 10.0 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 0.00% 8.0 ms 7.99 ms 2.00 10.0 0.0% 99.9 ms 0.0% 5.0 Hz 11.7 Hz 100.0% 100.0% 8.0 ms 0.00% 0.00% 300.0% -300.0% 0.0 rpm 100.00% 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0.00 Hz NO YES 0%

LOADSHARE CNST DC MAGN 500.0 ms RAMP STOP NO 5 rpm 30.0% 600 STOP RAMPING 0.5 s 5s ACC/DEC 1 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.00 s 1.0 s OFF 0.00 ms 1.0 s 10.0 2.50 s 0.0 ms 0.00 s 100.0% NO 0.00% 8.0 ms 7.99 ms 2.00 10.0 0.0% 99.9 ms 0.0% 5.0 Hz 11.7 Hz 100.0% 100.0% 8.0 ms 0.00% 0.00% 300.0% -300.0% 0.0 rpm 100.00% 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 0.00 Hz NO YES 0%

PB 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 384 385 386 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 458 459 460 461 476 477 478 479 480 501 502 503

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

177

Index 26.06 26.07 26.08 26.09 26.10 27 27.01 27.02 27.03 27.04 27.05 27.06 30 30.04 30.05 30.06 30.07 30.08 30.09 30.10 30.11 30.12 30.13 30.14 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.18 30.19 32 32.01 32.02 32.03 32.04 32.07 32.08 32.09 32.10 33 33.01 33.02 33.03 33.04 35 35.01 35.02 35.03 35.04 35.05 35.06 35.07 50 50.01 50.02 50.03 50.04

Name/Selection FLUX REF/MAX ACTIVE FLUX CTRL FLUX REF 2 FLUX MIN FLUX RAMP RATE BRAKE CHOPPER BRAKE CHOPPER CTL BR OVERLOAD FUNC BR RESISTANCE BR THERM TCONST MAX CONT BR POWER BR CTRL MODE FAULT FUNCTIONS MOTOR THERM PROT MOT THERM P MODE MOTOR THERM TIME MOTOR LOAD CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD BREAK POINT STALL FUNCTION STALL FREQ HI STALL TIME UNDERLOAD FUNC UNDERLOAD TIME UNDERLOAD CURVE MOTOR PHASE LOSS GROUND FAULT COMM FLT FUNC COMM TIMEOUT SUPERVISION SPEED1 FUNCTION SPEED1 LIMIT SPEED2 FUNCTION SPEED2 LIMIT TORQUE1 FUNCTION TORQUE1 LIMIT TORQUE2 FUNCTION TORQUE2 LIMIT INFORMATION SOFTWARE VERSION APPL SW VERSION APPL RELEASE DATE BOARD TYPE MTR TEMP MEAS MTR1 TEMP SEL MTR1 TEMP ALM LVL MTR1 TEMP FLT LVL MTR2 TEMP SEL MTR2 TEMP ALM LVL MTR2 TEMP FLT LVL MTR MODEL COMP PULSE ENCODER PULSE NR SPEED MEAS MODE ENCODER FAULT ENCODER DELAY

DRAW 100.0% NO 60.0% 25.0% 3.0 s OFF NO

DANCER 100.0% NO 60.0% 25.0% 3.0 s OFF NO

TENSION 100.0% NO 60.0% 25.0% 3.0 s OFF NO

LOADSHARE 100.0% NO 60.0% 25.0% 3.0 s OFF NO

PB 506 507 508 509 510

526 527 528 0s 0s 0s 0s 529 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 530 AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR 531 FAULT DTC (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 54.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600 s 1 NO FAULT NO ERR CHK 1000 ms NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% (version) (version) (date) (Control board type) NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C YES 2048 A_-_ B_-_ WARNING 1000 ms FAULT DTC (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 54.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600 s 1 NO FAULT NO ERR CHK 1000 ms NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% (version) (version) (date) (Control board type) NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C YES 2048 A_-_ B_-_ WARNING 1000 ms FAULT DTC (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 54.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600 s 1 NO FAULT NO ERR CHK 1000 ms NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% (version) (version) (date) (Control board type) NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C YES 2048 A_-_ B_-_ WARNING 1000 ms FAULT DTC (calculated) 100.0% 74.0% 54.0 Hz NO 20.0 Hz 20.00 s NO 600 s 1 NO FAULT NO ERR CHK 1000 ms NO 0 rpm NO 0 rpm NO 0% NO 0% (version) (version) (date) (Control board type) NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C NOT IN USE 110 C 130 C YES 2048 A_-_ B_-_ WARNING 1000 ms 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 651 652 653 654 657 658 659 660 676 677 678 679

726 727 728 729 730 731 732 1001 1002 1003 1004

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

178

Index 50.05 50.06 50.07 50.08 51 52 52.01 52.02 52.03 60 60.01 60.02 60.03 60.04 61 61.01 61.02 61.03 61.04 61.05 61.06 62 62.01 62.03 62.04 62.05 62.06 62.07 62.08 62.09 62.10 62.11 62.14 62.15 62.23 62.24 62.26 62.27 62.28 62.29 62.30 62.31 62.32 62.33 62.34 63 63.01 63.03 63.04 63.05 63.06 63.07 63.08 63.09 63.10 63.11 63.14

Name/Selection ENCODER CHANNEL SPEED FDBK SEL NTAC FILTER TIME ENC CABLE CHECK FIELDBUS DATA STANDARD MODBUS STATION NUMBER BAUDRATE PARITY APPLIC CONTROLS INERTIA COMP ENBL GEAR RATIO WEB LOSS TRIP WEB LOSS DELAY DRAW TRIM DRAW REF SEL DRAW W/TRIM DRAW RANGE +/DIGITL POT RATEms PROG COMM DRAW % DRAW REF PTR DANCER CONTROLS P-GAIN 1 INTEG TIME 1 ZERO INTEG TIME RANGE ADJUST TRIM REG REL TO MIN REF TO REG REV REG OUT DANCER CTL ENABLE DANCER LOAD SETPT DANCER FDBK INPUT MAX DANCER TRAVEL CENTER OFFSET WEB 2 SELECT P-GAIN 2 INTEG TIME 2 STALL ENABLE STALL SETPOINT STALL SPEED STALL P-GAIN STALL INTEG DAN CTRL ENBL PTR DAN LD SETPT PTR DAN FDBK PTR TENSION CONTROLS P-GAIN 1 INTEG TIME 1 ZERO INTEG TIME RANGE ADJUST TRIM REG REL TO MIN REF TO REG REV REG OUT TENSION CTL ENBL TENSION SETPOINT TENSION FDBK INPT MAXIMUM TENSION

DRAW CH 1 INTERNAL 2 ms NO

DANCER CH 1 INTERNAL 2 ms NO

TENSION CH 1 INTERNAL 2 ms NO

LOADSHARE CH 1 INTERNAL 2 ms NO

PB 1005 1006 1007 1008

1 9600 ODD NO 1.00:1 5.0% 1.0 s NOT SEL OFF DAN/TEN 5% 15000 DRAW ONLY C. 10000 (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible)

1 9600 ODD NO 1.00:1 5.0% 1.0 s NOT SEL OFF DAN/TEN 5% 15000 DRAW ONLY C. 10000 1.00 K 500 ms NOT SEL 5.0% SPD REF MAX 100.0 rpm NO DI3 AI3 AI2 20.0 inch 0.0 inch NOT SEL 1.00 k 1000 ms DISABLE 10% 0.0% 0.50 k 1000 ms +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible)

1 9600 ODD NO 1.00:1 5.0% 1.0 s NOT SEL OFF DAN/TEN 5% 15000 DRAW ONLY C. 10000 (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) 1.00 K 500 ms NOT SEL 5.0% SPD REF MAX 100.0 rpm NO DI3 AI3 AI2 20 lb

1 9600 ODD NO 1.00:1 5.0% 1.0 s NOT SEL OFF DAN/TEN 5% 15000 DRAW ONLY C. 10000 (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible)

1051 1052 1053 1195 1196 1197 1198 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1231 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1244 1245 1249 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1262

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

179

Index 63.15 63.16 63.17 63.23 63.24 63.26 63.27 63.28 63.29 63.30 63.31 63.32 63.33 63.34 64 64.01 64.02 64.03 64.04 64.09 64.10 64.11 65 65.01 65.02 65.03 70 70.01 70.02 70.05 70.06 70.07 70.08 70.09 70.10 70.11 70.12 83 83.01 83.02 83.03 83.04 83.05 84 84.01 84.02 84.05 84.06 84.07 84.08 84.09

Name/Selection TENSION MODE MODE TRANSITION STATIC FRICTION WEB 2 SELECT P-GAIN 2 INTEG TIME 2 STALL ENABLE STALL SETPOINT STALL SPEED STALL P-GAIN STALL INTEG TEN CTRL ENBL PTR TEN SETPT PTR TEN FDBK PTR INERTIA CONTROL INERTIA ON IN SPD SHAFT WEIGHT SHAFT OUTER DIA SHAFT INNER DIA MOTOR INERTIA GEARING INERTIA DECEL % SCALE LOADSHARE CTRL LDSH ADJ SEL LDSH RANGE +/LDSH ADJ PTR DDCS CONTROL CH0 NODE ADDR CH0 BAUD RATE CH2 NODE ADDR CH2 M/F MODE MASTER SIGNAL 1 MASTER SIGNAL 2 MASTER SIGNAL 3 M/F COMM DELAY M/F COM LOSS CTRL CHANNEL 3 ADDR ADAPT PROG CTRL ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT COMMAND EDIT BLOCK TIMELEVEL SEL PASSCODE ADAPTIVE PROGRAM STATUS FAULTED PAR BLOCK1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 OUTPUT

DRAW (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) NO 60.0 lb 5.0 inch 0.0 inch 4.50 lbft2 4.50 lbft2 100.0% (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) 1 1 Mbit/s 1 NOT IN USE 225 202 213 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0

DANCER (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) NO 60.0 lb 5.0 inch 0.0 inch 4.50 lbft2 4.50 lbft2 100.0% (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) 1 1 Mbit/s 1 NOT IN USE 225 202 213 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0

TENSION CLOSE LP SPD NOT SEL 0.0 lbft NOT SEL 1.00 K 1000 ms DISABLE 10% 0.0% 0.50 k 1000 ms +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 +.000.000.00 NO 60.0 lb 5.0 inch 0.0 inch 4.50 lbft2 4.50 lbft2 100.0% (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) 1 1 Mbit/s 1 NOT IN USE 225 202 213 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0

LOADSHARE (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) (not visible) NO 60.0 lb 5.0 inch 0.0 inch 4.50 lbft2 4.50 lbft2 100.0% NOT SEL 0% C. 10000 1 1 Mbit/s 1 SPD TQ FOLLOW 225 202 213 0 ms NO ERR CHK 1 EDIT NO 0 100 ms 0

PB 1263 1264 1265 1267 1268 1269 1270 1275 1276 1277 1285 1286 1287 1375 1376 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1644 1645

NO 0 0 0 0

NO 0 0 0 0

NO 0 0 0 0

NO 0 0 0 0

84.79 OUTPUT 85 USER CONSTANTS 85.01 CONSTANT1

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

180

Index 85.02 85.03 85.04 85.05 85.06 85.07 85.08 85.09 85.10 85.11 85.12 85.13 85.14 85.15 90 90.01 90.02 90.03 90.04 90.05 90.06 90.08 90.09 92 92.01 92.02 92.03 92.04 92.05 92.06 92.07 92.08 92.09 95 95.01 95.02 95.03 95.04 95.05 95.06 95.07 95.08 95.09 95.10 98 98.01 98.02 98.03 98.04 98.06 98.09 98.12 98.13 98.14 99 99.01

Name/Selection CONSTANT2 CONSTANT3 CONSTANT4 CONSTANT5 CONSTANT6 CONSTANT7 CONSTANT8 CONSTANT9 CONSTANT10 STRING1 STRING2 STRING3 STRING4 STRING5 DATASET INPUT SEL DATA 1 WORD 1 DATA 1 WORD 2 DATA 1 WORD 3 DATA 3 WORD 1 DATA 3 WORD 2 DATA 3 WORD 3 DATA 5 WORD 2 DATA 5 WORD 3 DATASET OUTPUT SEL DATA 2 WORD 1 DATA 2 WORD 2 DATA 2 WORD 3 DATA 4 WORD 1 DATA 4 WORD 2 DATA 4 WORD 3 DATA 6 WORD 1 DATA 6 WORD 2 DATA 6 WORD 3 HARDWARE SPECIF FAN SPD CTRL MODE FUSE SWITCH CTRL INT CONFIG USER EX/SIN REQUEST ENA INC SW FREQ LCU Q PW REF LCU DC REF LCU PAR1 SEL LCU PAR2 SEL TEMP INV AMBIENT OPTION MODULES ENCODER MODULE FIELDBUS MODULE DI/0 EXT MODULE 1 DI/0 EXT MODULE 2 AI/O EXT MODULE DI DEBOUNCE FILT AI/O MOTOR TEMP AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC START-UP DATA LANGUAGE

DRAW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 226 102 105 314 306 310 311 312 218 controlled Inverter type dependent 0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40 C NO NO NO NO NO 50 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 ENGLISH AM

DANCER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 226 102 105 314 306 310 311 312 218 controlled Inverter type dependent 0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40 C NO NO NO NO NO 50 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 ENGLISH AM

TENSION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 226 102 105 314 306 310 311 312 218 controlled Inverter type dependent 0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40 C NO NO NO NO NO 50 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 ENGLISH AM

LOADSHARE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 226 102 105 314 306 310 311 312 218 controlled Inverter type dependent 0 1 0 0 0 106 110 40 C NO NO NO NO NO 50 NO UNIPOLAR AI5 UNIPOLAR AI6 ENGLISH AM

PB 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1742 1743 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1909 1912 1913 1914 1926

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

181

Index 99.02 99.03 99.05 99.06 99.07 99.08 99.09 99.10 99.11 99.12

Name/Selection APPLICATION MACRO APPLIC RESTORE MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE MOTOR NOM CURRENT MOTOR NOM FREQ MOTOR NOM SPEED MOTOR NOM POWER MOTOR ID RUN CALC MOTOR TORQUE DEVICE NAME

DRAW DRAW NO 0V 0.0 A 60.0 Hz 1700 rpm 0.0 Hp NO (calculated)

DANCER DANCER NO 0V 0.0 A 60.0 Hz 1700 rpm 0.0 Hp NO (calculated)

TENSION TENSION NO 0V 0.0 A 60.0 Hz 1700 rpm 0.0 Hp NO (calculated)

LOADSHARE LOADSHARE NO 0V 0.0 A 60.0 Hz 1700 rpm 0.0 Hp NO (calculated)

PB 1927 1928 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937

* Indicates parameters that are visible only after entering proper code in 16.03 PASS CODE.

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

182

Additional data: actual signals and parameters

183

Appendix A1: Motor Rotor Inertia, US

The following tables are an example of common Inverter Duty AC Motor Rotor Inertia. The data presented is from Marathon Motors Blue Max XRI Premium Efficiency Motor Performance Series.
Horsepower 1 Poles 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 Base RPM 1756 1140 3460 1730 1175 3460 1750 1175 3525 1760 1174 3505 1750 1170 3540 1770 1175 3535 1785 1176 3550 1775 1178 3537 1773 1174 3560 1774 1180 3560 1773 1175 3545 1775 1185 3545 1770 1185 NEMA Frame 143T 145T 145T 145T 182T 145T 145T 184T 182T 182T 213T 184T 184T 215T 213T 213T 254T 215T 215T 256T 254T 254T 284T 256T 256T 286T 284TS 284T 324T 286TS 286T 326T 324TS 324T 364T 326TS 326T 365T FL Amps / 460 V 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.2 2.6 3.0 2.9 3.8 3.9 4.4 5.9 6.1 6.9 8.9 9.6 9.9 11.8 12.5 13.1 17.5 18.8 20.4 23.4 24.1 26.8 28.1 31.0 32.0 33.8 36.5 38.5 47.0 46.0 49.5 58.0 58.0 61.0 FL Torque (lbft) 3.0 4.6 2.3 4.5 6.7 3.0 6.0 8.9 4.5 9.0 13.5 7.5 15.0 22.5 11.0 22.5 33.5 15.0 30.0 44.5 22.0 44.0 66.5 29.5 59.5 89.0 37.0 74.0 112.0 44.5 88.5 134.0 59.5 118.0 177.0 74.0 148.0 222.0 Inertia (lbft2) 0.12 0.12 0.05 0.14 0.41 0.06 0.15 0.52 0.13 0.40 0.87 0.17 0.52 1.10 0.44 1.10 2.50 0.55 1.30 3.00 1.00 2.30 3.90 1.30 3.20 4.50 2.40 4.00 11.0 2.60 4.50 12.5 5.10 9.00 20.0 6.10 10.0 23.5

1.5

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

Appendix A1: Motor Rotor Inertia, US

184

Horsepower

Poles 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 4

Base RPM 3555 1775 1185 3555 1775 1185 3565 1775 1190 3570 1780 1185 1785 1185 1785 1190 1785 1190 1785 1875

NEMA Frame 364TS 364T 404T 365TS 365T 405T 405TS 405T 444T 444TS 444T 445T 445T 445T 445T 449T 449T 449T 449T 449T

FL Amps / 460 V 67.0 69.0 72.0 84.0 86.0 90.0 108.0 113.0 119.0 136.0 141.0 155.0 172.0 180.0 225.0 240.0 285.0 300.0 339.0 395.0

FL Torque (lbft) 88.5 177.0 266.0 110.0 222.0 332.0 147.0 295.0 441.0 184.0 369.0 553.0 441.0 662.0 588.0 883.0 735.0 1104.0 882.0 1030.0

Inertia (lbft2) 6.50 14.5 35.0 7.50 17.0 40.5 12.0 29.0 61.5 21.0 33.0 61.0 58.0 109.0 58.0 109.0 74.5 134.0 88.5 90.7

60

75

100

125

150 200 250 300 350

Appendix A1: Motor Rotor Inertia, US

185

Appendix A2: Motor Rotor Inertia, IEC

This table is an example of common Inverter Duty AC Motor Rotor Inertia. Data is from the ABB Cast Iron totally enclosed squirrel cage Motors Catalog. The electrical ratings are based on 400 VAC 50 Hz sinusoidal input.
Power (kW) 0.75 Poles 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 Base RPM 935 1410 2830 920 1410 2835 950 1410 2850 950 1425 2840 955 1415 2870 955 1435 2880 955 1430 2900 970 1430 2900 970 1455 2925 975 1460 2915 980 1470 2915 980 1470 2945 985 1475 2950 IEC Frame 90 S6 80 M4 80 M2 90 L6 90 S4 80 M2 100 L6 90 L4 90 S2 112 M6 100 L4 90 L2 132 S6 100 L4 100 L2 132 M6 112 M4 112 M2 132 M6 132 S4 132 S2 160 M 132 M4 132 S2 160 L 160 M 160 MA 180 L 160 L 160 M 200 ML 180 M 160 L 200 ML 180 L 180 M 225 SM 200 ML 200 ML FL Amps / 400 V 2.05 1.85 1.6 2.8 2.65 2.25 3.8 3.45 3.0 5 4.6 4.3 6.5 6.1 5.8 8.8 8 7.6 11.4 10.9 10.4 15.7 14.2 13.9 23 21.5 19.6 31 29 16.5 35 35 32.5 41.5 41.5 39.5 56 56 53 FL Torque (Nm) 7.65 5 2.53 11.5 7.45 3.7 15 10.1 5.0 22 14.7 7.4 30 20.2 10 40 26.6 13 55 36.7 18 74 50 24.5 108 72 36 147 98 49 180 120 61 214 143 72 291 194 97 Inertia (kgm2) 0.0039 0.0021 0.00097 0.0049 0.0029 0.0012 0.011 0.0037 0.0015 0.017 0.0075 0.002 0.038 0.0098 0.0044 0.049 0.014 0.0075 0.065 0.031 0.013 0.088 0.04 0.016 0.106 0.066 0.039 0.207 0.09 0.047 0.37 0.161 0.054 0.43 0.191 0.077 0.64 0.29 0.15

1.1

1.5

2.2

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

Appendix A2: Motor Rotor Inertia, IEC

186

Power (kW) 37

Poles 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2

Base RPM 985 1480 2950 990 1475 2970 990 1480 2975 992 1484 2977 992 1483 2975 991 1487 2982 991 1487 2982 992 1486 2981 992 1486 2978 992 1487 2980

IEC Frame 250 SM 225 SM 200 ML 280 SM 225 SM 225 SM 280 SM 250 SM 250 SM 315 SM 280 SM 280 SM 315 SM 280 SM 280 SM 315 SM 315 SM 315 SM 315 ML 315 SM 315 SM 355 S 315 SM 315 SM 355 SM 315 ML 315 ML 355 SM 355 S 355 S

FL Amps / 400 V 67 68 64 82 81 79 101 98 95 141 135 131 163 158 152 202 192 194 240 232 228 280 282 269 355 351 334 450 430 410

FL Torque (Nm) 359 239 120 434 291 145 531 355 177 722 483 241 866 580 289 1060 706 352 1272 848 423 1540 1028 513 1925 1285 641 2407 1606 801

Inertia (kgm2) 1.16 0.37 0.18 1.85 0.42 0.26 2.2 0.72 0.49 3.2 1.25 0.8 4.1 1.5 0.9 4.9 2.3 1.2 5.8 2.6 1.4 10.4 2.9 1.7 12.5 3.5 2.1 12.5 6.5 3.8

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

Appendix A2: Motor Rotor Inertia, IEC

187

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

Figure B-1 Dancer Control

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

188

Figure B-2 Tension Control

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

189

Figure B-3 Torque Control

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

190

Figure B-4 SPD/TQ Chain 1

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

191

Figure B-5 SPD/TQ Chain 2

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

192

Appendix B: Software One-Line Diagrams

ABB Oy AC Drives P.O. Box 184 FI-00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone +358 10 22 211 Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Internet www.abb.com

Automation Technologies Drives & Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785-3200 800-HELP-365 Fax 262 780-5135

ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd. No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing, P.R. China, 100015 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788 Fax +86 10 5821 7618 Internet www.abb.com

3AUA0000002046 / 3AFE64787616 REV C / EN EFFECTIVE: 04/14/2008 SUPERSEDES: 03/11/2004